HomeMy WebLinkAboutBrider Garage Repair Specs
Bridger Garage Repairs TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 00 01 10/1
Project Name: Bridger Garage Repairs
Project Number: DESMAN Project No. 60-22103.01-2
Project Date: March 2023
00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
00 11 16 Notice to Bidders
00 42 00 Bid Proposal Form
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 Summary of Work
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
01 25 01 Substitution form
01 29 00 Application for Payment
01 31 00 Project Coordination
01 33 00 Submittals
01 35 13 Cutting and Patching
01 42 00 Reference Standards and Definitions
01 45 00 Quality Control Services
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities
01 60 00 Materials and Equipment
01 78 00 Project Closeout
01 78 30 Warranties and Bonds
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
03 31 24 Concrete Repair Using High-Strength, Fast Setting Materials
03 37 15 Concrete Repair Using Trowel Applied Mortar
03 37 16 Concrete Repair Using Form and Pump Materials
03 64 23 Pressure Epoxy Injection
03 64 33 Pressure Chemical Grout Injection
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04 20 00 Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors
05 12 00 Structural Steel
Bridger Garage Repairs TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 00 01 10/2
05 15 15 Hot Dip Galvanization
05 31 00 Metal Decking
05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals
05 52 16 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 19 00 Clear Penetrating Concrete Sealers
07 92 00 Sealants and Caulking
07 95 00 Expansion Joint Seals
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 90 00 Painting
09 90 14 Pavement Marking
End of Section
Bridger Garage Repairs NOTICE TO BIDDERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 00 11 16/1
00 11 16
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed proposals, addressed to City of Bozeman, MT and endorsed on the outside of the envelope with
the name of the Bidder and Contract Name. Bids will be received until the time and date determined by
the City of Bozeman.
Bridger Garage
Bozeman, MT
Attn: Ben Bailey
Neighborhood Services Code Enforcement & Parking Enforcement Manager
in accordance with Plans and Specifications prepared by DESMAN, 7900 E. Union Ave. Denver, CO 80237
The right is hereby reserved to reject any or all proposals, or adjust the scope of work to meet available
funds. Proposal received after the deadline will automatically be disqualified.
A Pre-bid Conference will be held at a date and time and locations determined by the City of Bozeman,
MT
All questions regarding the Plans and Specifications should be addressed in writing to the following:
Ben Bailey
Email: bbailey@bozeman.net
Cc: Nic Focken
Email: nfocken@bozeman.net
Cc: Hoshi Engineer, PE, SE. Project
Manager DESMAN
Email: hengineer@desman.com
Aurora Municipal Center INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
DESMAN Project 60-21108-1 00 21 00/1
SECTION 00 21 00
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The Notice to Bidders, Instruction to Bidders, Bid Proposal, the Agreement, the General Conditions, the
Supplementary Conditions, the Technical Specifications and Drawings compose the Contract
Documents.
Proposals to be entitled to consideration must be made in accordance with the following instructions:
A.PROPOSALS:
1.Each proposal shall be properly signed as follows:
When a CORPORATION with the name of the corporation, signature of an officer or
other person properly authorized to enter into obligations for it and his title.
When a PARTNERSHIP with name of partnership and signature of one of the partners.
When SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP with his signature.
B. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION:
1.Execution of the Contract Documents will involve some consideration for allowing the
Owners to carry on many of their normal functions. The Contractor shall be responsible
not to make the conduct of normal daily business difficult or impossible due to noise,
inaccessibility of non-work areas, odors, fumes or any hazardous condition.
2.Phasing of the repair work shall be done to minimize disruptions to the users and
maintain the day-to-day operations of the garage in a safe and professional manner.
3.The successful Contractor, prior to start of work, shall submit a schedule of activities for
the repair period for approval by Owner and Engineer. The schedule shall include
drawings showing the general phasing of the work, shoring locations, parking spaces
that would be blocked off and traffic circulation and traffic controls.
C. STARTING AND COMPLETION TIME:
1.Bid Proposal shall be based on completion of all base contract and alternate work by the
calendar date XX , 2022.
D. GENERAL
l.Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or documents, or
should there be any doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the
Engineer, who will send a written instruction to all bidders. Neither Owner nor Engineer will
be responsible for any oral instructions. Lack of such notification to the Engineer will
Aurora Municipal Center INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
DESMAN Project 60-21108-1 00 21 00/2
indicate that the bidder considers the documents to be sufficiently complete to prepare a
bid for complete installation including all necessary accessory parts.
2.The drawings and specifications shall be considered to be cooperative and anything
appearing in the specifications which may not be indicated on the plans, or vice versa, shall
be considered as part of the contract and must be executed by the contractor the same as
though indicated by both.
3.Before submitting a proposal, bidders should carefully examine the drawings and
specifications: Check all schedules, visit the site, fully inform themselves as to all existing
conditions and limitations, and shall include in the proposal a sum to cover the cost of all
items included in that part.
4.Any addenda issued during the time of bidding shall be taken into account in preparing
proposals, and shall become a part of the contract documents.
E. MISCELLANEOUS
1.All (local, state, and federal) laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to this class
or type of construction shall be obeyed in regard to preparation of bids, letting of contracts,
and complete installation of work.
2.Wherever in the contract documents, a particular article, material, device, form of
construction, fixtures, etc., is shown or specified, such article, material, device, form of
construction, fixture, etc., shall be known as standard. All PROPOSALS SHALL BE BASED ON
STANDARDS SPECIFIED, and where two or more are named, bidders may bid on any so
named. The Contractor is responsible for any extra cost due to changes required by
substitutions or selection of any other than the first named product. If field conditions exist
which would preclude the installation of any product or system as designed by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall include, in his bid, an alternate to the specified product or system for
the Owner and Engineer's consideration and approval. If the Contractor assumes an
alternate without identifying it in the bid and is thereby less in the bid, they are still liable
for installation of the specified product or system.
3.SUBSTITUTIONS for standards may be bid ONLY AS ALTERNATES, and written approval
secured from the Engineer prior to award of the Contract.
F. CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION:
1.Successful bidders shall furnish to the Owner and Engineer, at the time of submitting the
proposals the following:
a.List of Sub-Contractors
1)Division of Work
2)Amount of Sub-Contract
3)Firm Name
4)Address
Aurora Municipal Center INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
DESMAN Project 60-21108-1 00 21 00/3
5)Telephone Number
6)Representative
b.List of Major Material Suppliers:
1)Division of Work
2)Amount of Material Purchase Order
3)Firm Name
4)Address
5)Telephone Number
6)Representative
c.Contract Cost Breakdown:
1)Shall be provided on AIA Form G-703.
2)Application for Payment
2.Application for Payment:
a.The Contractor shall furnish, free of charge, the necessary blank copies of AIA Form
G-702 and G-703 for his applications for Payment.
b.Partial payments made as the work progresses shall in no way be considered as an
acceptance of any portion of the labor or material embraced in the contract.
c.Material delivered at the site and approved by the Engineer and included in a
certified estimate for partial payment shall become the property of the Owner and in
no case shall such materials be removed from the site. However, if such material is
stolen, destroyed or damaged by casualty before being used, the contractor will be
required to replace it at his own expense. Storage of materials shall comply with the
manufacturer's instructions or recommendations
d.The Contractor, upon receipt of payment, shall reimburse each sub-contractor for
labor and materials for which the contractor has received payment from the Owner.
The contractor upon receipt of payment, shall pay each material supplier for
materials for which the contractor has received payment from the Owner.
e.Contractor's requests for payment shall normally be submitted by the Contractor
once a month.
f.During the course of work, a retainage of five (5%) percent will be withheld from
work performed.
g.During the course of construction, payment on estimates approved by the Engineer
and filed with the Owner shall be made within 30 days.
h.All monies paid on account to any contractor for materials or labor shall be regarded
as funds in his trust for payment of any and all obligations relating to this contract
Aurora Municipal Center INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
DESMAN Project 60-21108-1 00 21 00/4
and no such amount of monies shall be permitted to accrue to the contractor until all
such obligations are satisfied. Evidence, satisfactory to the Owner, shall be
submitted with each payment request to show that all current obligations relating to
this work are satisfied before releasing any payment due on the work. The evidence
shall include all lien waivers from the general contractor, subcontractors and
material suppliers. Before payment of the final estimate, each contractor shall file an
affidavit with the Owner, stating that monetary obligations relating to lienable items
in connection with this work have been fulfilled. When the major portion of the
project is substantially completed and occupied, or in use, or otherwise accepted and
there exists no other reasons to withhold retainage, the retained percentages held in
connection with such portion will be released from escrow and paid to the
Contractor, withholding only that amount necessary to assure completion. The
balance of funds will be paid to the Contractor within thirty days from the date of
completion and after acceptance by the Engineer and Owner. Provided, however,
that nothing in this Contract shall be construed to create an obligation or incur a
liability against the Owner in excess of the encumbrances issued to support this
Contract.
i.Payment for materials stored, but not installed, may require the Engineer to visit the
Contractors place of storage for verification of all items on the Contractor's
certificate. The contractor shall certify that the items are in agreement with the
specifications, and approved their incorporation into the project.
3.Progress Schedule:
The start of construction shall be based on the Owner's authorization. After the contract is
awarded, a meeting shall be held at the job site before work is started, to be attended by
representative of the General Contractor and all affected Subcontractors, the Engineer, and
the Owner's Representative, to work out a definite schedule to be followed for starting and
completing each Phase of the work and provide information for Progress Schedule.
G. WARRANTY
1.The contractor is required to submit a Five Year Corrective Certificate (Warranty) for
all the work performed under this Contract.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs BiD PROPOSAL FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 Page 1
BID PROPOSAL FORM
Submitted by: Date:
__________________________________ _________________________________
Bridger Garage Repairs
City of Bozeman
Bozeman, MT
Attn: Ben Bailey
that the construction documents dated February, 2023 and prepared by DESMAN, for the construction
of said project and having also received, read, and taken into account, Addenda Nos.:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
and likewise, having inspected the site of and the conditions affecting and governing the cost and
construction of said project, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all material and perform all
labor, as specified and described in said Specifications and as shown in the plans for the said work, for
the Contract Amount of:
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR BASE BID WORK $
Record here from Bid Form
This Contract Amount is to be based on the schedule of quantities listed in the Bid Form, which
covers this bid proposal for the restoration work in installed condition. Items for material,
labor, supplies, contractors mean and methods or equipment are not specifically enumerated
for payment as separate items, but which are reasonably required to complete the work as
shown on the drawings or as described in the specifications, are considered as subsidiary
obligations of the Contractor. No separate measurement or payment is made for them. Unit
prices for bid items shall include all costs for overhead, profit, insurance and applicable state
and local taxes. Should any mathematical errors be discovered in the preparation of these
proposals, the correct extension of the bidder's unit price times the estimated quantity of work
will be the basis for computing the true bid figure.
Base Contract (Work Installed) See Bid Form for Detailed Work Items
GENERAL
The Bidder shall, before submitting his Proposal, carefully examine the Contract Documents. He shall inspect in detail the site of the proposed work and familiarize himself with all the local conditions affecting The Work and the detailed requirements of construction. If his Proposal is accepted, he will be responsible for all errors in his Proposal resulting from his failure or neglect to comply with these instructions or errors
______________________________
Bidder’s Name
Bridger Garage Repairs PROPOSAL FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 Page 2
in judgment arising from said inspections of the work site and examination of the Contract Documents. The Engineer and/or the Owner will, in no case, be responsible for any losses or change in Contractor's anticipated profits resulting from such failure or neglect.
If the Bidder finds any language in the Contract Documents inconsistent, vague or difficult to understand or
interpret, for any reason, he shall request clarification in writing from the Engineer, no later than ten (10)
working days prior to the scheduled date of receipt of proposals.
The Engineer shall issue a written response thereto in writing to all Bidders known to the Owner no later
than three (3) working days prior to the bid due date. Unless the Bidder seeks clarification in accordance
with this paragraph, he will be deemed to have waived his rights, if any he had, to object to said Contract
language as vague or misleading for any reason.
When the Plans and Special Conditions include information pertaining to surface observations, material testing and other preliminary investigations, such information represents only the opinion of the Engineer as to the location, character, or quantity of the materials encountered and is only included for the convenience of the Bidder. The Owner/Engineer assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of the information, and there is no guarantee, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout The Work, or that unanticipated
developments may not occur. Said information shall not be considered by the parties as a basis for the
Contract award amount. The successful Bidder shall coordinate construction operations through the Owner
and the Engineer.
The Bidder agrees that adequate time was allowed the Bidder to inspect all work sites and, unless express written request has been made therefore, the Engineer/Owner will be presumed to have supplied the Bidder all the information and access required to adequately complete the Proposal.
The estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under these Specifications are given in the Proposal. All quantities are to be considered as approximate and are to be used only for comparison of bids. The unit and lump sum prices to be tendered by the Bidders are to be for the
scheduled quantities as they may be increased or decreased. Payments will be made to the Contractor only
for the actual quantities of work performed and materials furnished in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications.
The scheduled quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished may each be increased or diminished or entirely deleted. Such changes may become necessary for the best interest of the project due to circumstances not known at the time the Contract was entered into or arising thereafter. In the event, in the sole judgment of the Engineer or its representative, such changes become necessary, the unit and lump sum prices set forth in the Proposal and embodied in the Contract shall remain valid.
Any extra work beyond the scheduled quantities requiring additional cost to the Owner shall be
approved by the Owner prior to taking such action. Claims for extra work which have not been
authorized in writing by the Owner and approved by the Engineer will be rejected and the Contractor
shall not be entitled to payment thereof.
RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS AND SIGNING CONTRACTS
In submitting this Bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids. If written notice of acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within ninety (90)days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn by writtennotification, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver a Contract in the prescribed form. The workshall be commenced by the Successful Bidder on the date specified in the notice after the Contract isexecuted.
______________________________
Bidder’s Name
Bridger Garage Repairs PROPOSAL FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 Page 3
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Bidder has caused its/his signature and seal to be affixed thereto by its duly authorized officers:
This day of , 2022
Firm Name
By
Title
Telephone No. & Email:
Official Address
DIVISION 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Bridger Garage Repairs SUMMARY OF WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 10 00/1
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.02 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.The intent of the Plans and Specifications is to describe The Work which the Contractor
undertakes to do, in full compliance with the Contract, and it is understood that the
Contractor will furnish, unless otherwise provided in the Contract, all materials,
machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, labor, and all other incidentals
necessary to the satisfactory prosecution and completion of the Work. The Plans and
Specifications are complementary, and what is called for by either is as binding as if called
for by both.
B.The Special Conditions (if applicable) shall control where in conflict with the Standard
Specifications. However, such portions of the Standard Specifications not in conflict or not
rendered meaningless by the Special provisions shall remain in full force and effect and be
binding on the parties hereto.
C.In the event the Contractor discovers any error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents,
he shall immediately call upon the Engineer for his decision. The Engineer shall then make
such corrections and interpretations as may be deemed necessary for the fulfillment of
the intent of the Specifications, Special Conditions, Plans and other Contract Documents,
as construed by him and his decision shall be final.
1.03 SUMMARY OF WORK
A.General Mobilization: This work consists of all labor, materials, tools and equipment
required for setting-up general plant, storage/staging areas and facilities required by State
Laws and City Ordinances; and the general mobilization of equipment required for the
completion of the work shown on the Contract Documents. The cost of this item shall
include all permits and fees required to perform the project, unless otherwise noted in the
Contract Documents, and all expenses for the de-mobilization to a ‘broom clean or better’
condition after the work has been completed. If a building permit is required, it will be
the contractor’s responsibility to get the necessary permit to perform the repair work,
unless noted otherwise in the documents. This work shall also include the following
items:
1.Reviewing existing architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing and Fire
protection (FP) plans, if available, and existing conditions for each phase of the work
Bridger Garage Repairs SUMMARY OF WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 10 00/2
to identify the likelihood of embedded conduits/wiring in the floor slabs. All existing
mechanical, electrical, plumbing trench/ floor drains, and FP services overhead or wall
mounted, shall be maintained in place, restored or replaced by the Contractor for all
work areas in coordination with MEP/FP consultant.
2.Provide effective ventilation system to safely remove all dust and hazardous fumes
generated from the concrete demolition and any surface treatment applications.
3.Protection of overhead fire protection system to be maintained in-place, if any.
4.Protection and/or relocation of existing overhead mechanical and electrical systems, if
any, in order to implement repairs.
5.Removal of loose overhead concrete from the structural concrete members in areas
adjoining work locations within the structure prior to the start of any demolition work.
6.Coordinate and assist the security and property management personnel with respect
to the security of spaces during the repair work.
7.Electricity (power) and water required for the completion of the work shall be
furnished by the Owner at existing fixtures or outlets. (The Owner will not provide
any temporary pipes, cables, etc.) The contractor shall provide temporary lighting in
the work areas, as required, during the restoration work. If the existing capacity is
insufficient for the contractor's use, the contractor is responsible for supplementing
existing capacity as needed.
B.Concrete Work: Removal and replacement of deteriorated concrete in slabs, beams,
columns, curbs, corbels and walls, routing and sealing cracks and/or routing and filling of
cracks in various members and epoxy injection at a specified beam location.
C.Moisture Protection: New cove and joint sealants, sealants around pipe openings,
application of penetrating sealers, installing new expansion joints.
D.Other Work: Installation of new fencing at specified locations on the south side of the
garage, removing damaged vinyl screen along grid C and providing new barrier cables,
replacing damaged bricks, removing rust off connections and providing rust inhibiting
paint, new rails at specified location, replacing missing signage, re-stripping parking stalls
and traffic markings. Including edges of curbs.
Miscellaneous Items: This work consists of items not otherwise specifically indicated or
shown on the plans, but which are ancillary to the specified scope of work. This work shall
also include the following:
1.The contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, relocate/ remove all signs, barricades,
cones, warning lights, and other safety control devices and temporary signage
required for the proper execution of the project. The Engineer and the Owner shall
Bridger Garage Repairs SUMMARY OF WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 10 00/3
review the safety control device placement before work begins and also prior to the
beginning of work on any subsequent construction stages. Any deficiencies in the
location or arrangement of devices shall be corrected by the contractor before
starting work.
2.The miscellaneous work shall include documentation of any non-functioning
electrical/mechanical systems within work areas prior to contractor’s activities.
This documentation should be based on the contractor's condition survey
performed immediately prior to the scheduled mobilization. The contractor shall
not start the mobilization until the Owner approves the submittal.
3.The miscellaneous work shall also include cleaning and repairs to the existing
drainage system in work areas of each parking structure, as required.
4.The miscellaneous work shall also include the dismantling of any existing
mechanical, fire protection and electrical installations in the repair areas in order to
perform the overhead repairs to the deck soffit, as required. The temporarily
dismantled installations shall be reinstalled immediately after the repairs are
completed.
At other locations of repair areas, the contractor shall provide adequate protection
systems, as required, for the existing mechanical, plumbing and electrical
installations to remain in-place.
5.The miscellaneous work shall include re-striping areas affected by waterproofing
membrane installation as reasonably necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 00/1
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
B.The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under
Section "Submittals."
C.Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" applicability of industry
standards to products specified.
D.Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product
options are included under Section "Materials and Equipment."
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other
terms used in the Contract Documents.
B.Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of
the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered
substitutions:
1.Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior
to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and
are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2.Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Engineer.
3.Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents.
4.The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and
orders issued by governing authorities.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 00/2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received
within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after 30 days of the
commencement of Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer.
1.Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit
requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order
proposals.
2.Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in
each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide
complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for
substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:
a.Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication
and installation procedures.
b.Samples, where applicable or requested.
c.A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution
with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include
elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.
d.Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications
needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the
Owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to
accommodate the proposed substitution.
e.A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's
Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the
substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall
Contract Time.
f.Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the
Contract Sum.
g.Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to
or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract
Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application
indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment
or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure
of the substitution to perform adequately.
3.Engineer’s Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the
Engineer will request additional information or documentation necessary for
evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week
of receipt of the additional information or documentation, whichever is later, the
Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 00/3
substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or
obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name.
Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by when
one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer;
otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with
these requirements.
1.Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2.Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3.The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
4.The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
5.The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method
cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or
coordinate activities properly.
6.The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary
approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be
approved.
7.A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy
conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting
responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for
the Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and
evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate
Contractors, and similar considerations.
8.The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner
that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9.The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other
materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can
be coordinated.
10.The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty
required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the
proposed substitution provide the required warranty.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 00/4
B.The Contractor's submittal and Engineer's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents
does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 01/1
SECTION 01 25 01 – SUBSTITUTION FORM
PART 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Name and Scope of Material, Product Specified:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Specification Section Number: _________________________
Specification Section Title: _________________________________________
1.2 Name and Scope of Material, Product Substituted:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Name of Manufacturer of Substitution:
Name: _________________________________________________
Telephone/Email: _________________________________________________
1.4 Reasons for requesting substitution:
Substitution for Cause
Substitution for Convenience
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
1.5 Does this substitution affect other materials or systems, such as dimensional revisions,
redesign of structure, or modifications to other work?
No
Yes. If yes, describe impact of substitution on other products or systems:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 01/2
PART 2 - SUBSTANTIATING DOCUMENTATION
2.1 Requests for Substitution shall be accompanied by substantiating documentation per
requirements of Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 - CONTRACT COORDINATION
3.1 Savings or Credit to Contract Sum for accepting:
__________________________________________ Dollars ($ __________________)
3.2 Other benefit accruing to Owner for accepting substitute:
________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
3.3 In making a request for substitution installer and the Contractor each represents that:
A.It has examined the Drawings and Specifications and has determined that, to the best of
his/her knowledge, the proposed substitution is appropriate for the use intended in the
Contract Documents.
B.It shall coordinate the installation of accepted substitution into the Work, making such
changes as may be required for the Work to be complete.
C.It waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently become
apparent.
3.4 The undersigned certifies:
A.The proposed substitution has been fully investigated and is equal or superior to specified
products or systems.
B.The same or better warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified
material, product or equipment.
C.The cost data as stated above is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract.
D.The coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for substitution, if
approved, will be complete in all respects at no additional costs, or as credit to Contract
Amount as stated above.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 01/3
Contractor: _________________________________________________
By (Print/Sign): _________________________________________________
END OF FORM
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 01/4
PART 4 - ENGINEER’S ACTION
END OF SECTION 012501
ENGINEER’S RESPONSE TO CONTRACTOR
Specification Section Number: _________________________
Specification Section Title: _____________________________________
Article/Paragraph: _________________________
Contractor: _____________________________________
Request Number: _________________________
Acceptance of this Substitution is based upon the Contractor's representation that he
has checked and approved this submittal and has verified the dimensions, quantities,
and field dimension criteria related thereto. Acceptance of this Substitution does not
relieve the contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the
contract documents unless the contractor has specifically informed the engineer in
writing of such deviation at the time of submission. The contractor shall not be relieved
from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings, product data or samples
by the engineer's approval thereof.
Signed: ________________________________ Date: _____________
No Exception Taken
Make Corrections Noted; Revise and Resubmit
Rejected
Notes:
1.Clarifications to or changes of project schedule or time shall be processed using
Change Order Forms or as otherwise required by the Contract.
2.Properly prepared and processed Substitution Requests do not constitute a
replacement for Submittals as required by the Specifications.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBSTITUTION FORM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 25 01/5
END OF SECTION 02 25 01
Bridger Garage Repairs APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 29 00/1
SECTION 01 29 00
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
Application for Payment.
B.The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Division 1
Section "Submittals".
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1.Submit the Schedule of Values to the Engineer at the earliest feasible date, but in no
case later than 7 days before the date schedule for submittal of the initial Application
for Payment.
B.Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the
format for the Schedule of Values.
1.Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.Project name and location;
b.Project Number;
c.Contractor's name and address;
d.Date of submittal.
2.Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.Work Item Name identified in the Proposal Form;
b.Unit Price, Quantity, and Extension identified in the proposal form;
c.Current Quantity Complete (for unit price items);
d.Percent Completed (for lump sum items)
e.Related Specification Section;
f.Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value;
g.Dollar value;
h.Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to
total 100 percent.
3.Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Application for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract
amounts down into several line items.
Bridger Garage Repairs APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 29 00/2
4.For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or
equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate
line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent
stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
5.Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders
or Construction Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A.Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by the Engineer and paid for by the Owner.
1.The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement (or
as agreed upon). The period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is
the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.Payment Application Forms: Use a modified version of AIA Document G 702 and Continuation
Sheets G 703 as the form for Application for Payment, or in a form as otherwise acceptable to
the Owner.
D.Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and
execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor.
Incomplete applications will be returned without action.
1.Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.
2.Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to
the last day of the construction period covered by the application.
3.Include full disclosure of all General Condition backup with each payment request.
E.Transmittal: Submit 1 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Engineer or by
electronic format if acceptable to Owner.
1.Transmit copies with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate
information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
2.Submit applications in a timely manner to allow sufficient review time by the Owner and
Engineer.
F.Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanics
liens from subcontractors or sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period
covered by the current application. Waivers shall be submitted directly to the Owner
concurrent with the payment request submitted to the Engineer.
1.Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount currently requested, prior to
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2.When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Bridger Garage Repairs APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 29 00/3
a.Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of Work covered by the application who could
lawfully be entitled to a lien.
3.Provide all waivers and affidavits of payment of debts and claims on the "Chicago Title
and Trust" forms.
G.Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:
1.List of subcontractors (if any);
2.List of principal suppliers and fabricators;
3.Schedule of Values;
H.Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any
Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of
designated portions of the Work.
1.Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this
application include:
a.Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety;
I.Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or
coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following:
1.Completion of Project closeout requirements;
2.Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion;
3.Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled;
4.Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue
delay;
5.Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner;
6.Removal of temporary facilities and services;
7.Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT COORDINATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 31 00/1
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A.This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to:
1.Coordination.
2.Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3.General installation provisions.
4.Cleaning and protection.
B.Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section
"Submittals".
1.03 COORDINATION:
A.Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections
of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of
the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of
the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
1.Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of
other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule
construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.
2.Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different
components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance,
service and repair.
3.Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later
installation.
B.Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved
outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as
required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.
1.Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors
where coordination of their Work is required.
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT COORDINATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 31 00/2
C.Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and
ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1.Preparation of schedules.
2.Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3.Delivery and processing of submittals.
4.Progress meetings.
5.Project Close-out activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are
carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and
materials.
1.Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not
actually incorporated in, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition
of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close
and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials
fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components.
1.Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop
Drawings.
2.Indicate required installation sequences.
3.Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."
B.Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's
principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in
attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list
their addresses and telephone numbers.
1.Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field
office, and each temporary telephone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT COORDINATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 31 00/3
A.Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect
both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner.
B.Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions
and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations
are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.
C.Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to
installation. Reject damaged and defective items.
D.Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing
Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building
movement.
E.Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in
exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the
Engineer for final decision.
F.Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.
G.Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will
ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction
from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.
H.Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize
the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
I.Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual
components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the
particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to
the Engineer for final decision.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure
protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B.Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components
to ensure operability without damaging effects.
C.Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous,
damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT COORDINATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 31 00/4
1.Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2.Excessively high or low temperatures.
3.Air contamination or pollution.
4.Water or ice.
5.Solvents.
6.Chemicals.
7.Puncture.
8.Abrasion.
9.Heavy traffic.
10.Soiling, staining and corrosion.
11.Bacteria.
12.Combustion.
13.Electrical current.
14.Unusual wear or other misuse.
15.Contact between incompatible materials.
16.Destructive testing.
17.Misalignment.
18.Excessive weathering.
19.Unprotected storage.
20.Improper shipping or handling.
21.Theft.
22.Vandalism.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/1
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required
for performance of the Work, including;
1.Contractor's construction schedule.
2.Submittal schedule.
3.Daily construction reports.
4.Shop Drawings.
5.Product Data.
6.Samples.
B.Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract
Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but
are not limited to:
1.Permits.
2.Applications for payment.
3.Performance and payment bonds.
4.Insurance certificates.
5.List of Subcontractors.
C.The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Applications for Payment."
D.Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services."
1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of
related construction activities to avoid delay.
1.Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/2
a.The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
3.Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a
result of the time required to process submittals, including time for re-submittals.
a.Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing
must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The
Engineer will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
b.If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial
submittal.
c.Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
d.No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to
transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to
permit processing.
B.Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or
title block.
1.Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop
Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action
taken.
2.Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action
taken.
a.Project name.
b.Date.
c.Name and address of Engineer.
d.Name and address of Contractor.
e.Name and address of subcontractor.
f.Name and address of supplier.
g.Name of manufacturer.
h.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
C.Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Engineer using a transmittal form. Submittals
received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.
1.On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the
form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
2.Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G 810.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/3
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is
affected by requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors
and partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
B.Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including testing and installation.
C.Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the
Engineer, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled
dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office.
1.When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
1.05 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A.After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a
complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required
for establishment of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and
the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule.
2.Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during
the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information:
a.Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b.Related Section number.
c.Submittal category.
d.Name of subcontractor.
e.Description of the part of the Work covered.
f.Scheduled date for re-submittal.
g.Scheduled date the Engineer's final release or approval.
B.Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the
Engineer's, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal
dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1.When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
C.Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/4
each meeting.
1.06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
A.Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events
at the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Engineer at weekly intervals:
1.List of subcontractors at the site.
2.Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3.High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
4.Accidents and unusual events.
5.Meetings and significant decisions.
6.Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
7.Meter readings and similar recordings.
8.Emergency procedures.
9.Orders and requests of governing authorities.
10.Change Orders received, implemented.
11.Services connected, disconnected.
12.Equipment or system tests and start-ups.
13.Partial Completions, occupancies.
14.Substantial Completions authorized.
1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS
A.Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or
otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard
information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop
Drawings.
B.Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,
patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information:
1.Dimensions.
2.Identification of products and materials included.
3.Compliance with specified standards.
4.Notation of coordination requirements.
5.Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6.Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 36" x 48".
7.Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and one
blue- or black-line print for the Engineer's review; the reproducible print will be
returned.
8.Initial Submittal: Submit 2 blue- or black-line prints for the Engineer's review; one
will be returned.
9.Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints; submit 5 prints where required
for maintenance manuals. 2 prints will be retained; the remainder will be
returned.
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/5
10.Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints and 2 additional prints where
required for maintenance manuals, plus the number of prints needed by the
Engineer for distribution. 2 prints will be retained; the remainder returned.
a.One of the prints returned shall be marked-up and maintained as a
"Record Document."
11.Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action
taken in connection with construction.
C.Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and
integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during
fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended.
1.Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in section "Project Coordination"
and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or
Product Data.
2.Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements.
Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in
use of space.
1.08 PRODUCT DATA
A.Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions,
catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring
diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared
because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."
1.Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product
Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required,
mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following
information:
a.Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b.Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
c.Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d.Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e.Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
2.Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.
3.Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single-copy of Product Data
where selection of options is required.
4.Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/6
where required for maintenance manuals. The Engineer will retain one, and
will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or
modifications required.
a.Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
5.Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors,
suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance
of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
a.Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data
applicable is in the installer's possession.
b.Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with
construction.
1.09 SAMPLES
A.Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically
identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets,
and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.
1.Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Engineer's Sample. Include the
following:
a.Generic description of the Sample.
b.Sample source.
c.Product name or name of manufacturer.
d.Compliance with recognized standards.
e.Availability and delivery time.
2.Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of
these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these
characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered
and installed.
a.Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are
inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not
less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations.
b.Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly,
connections, operation and similar construction characteristics.
c.Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for
incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/7
use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of
Sample submittals.
3.Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture
or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of
choices for the material or product.
a.Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Engineer's
mark indicating selection and other action.
4.Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3
sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken.
5.Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons
throughout the course of construction.
a.Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
b.Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction
associated with each set.
B.Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,
manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of
the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field
Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or
finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
a.Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible.
Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
1.10 ENGINEER’S ACTION
A.Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return
is required or requested, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action
taken, and return promptly.
1.Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B.Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory
action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action
taken:
1.Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Accepted," that part of
the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with
Bridger Garage Repairs SUBMITTALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 33 00/8
requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that
compliance.
2.Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted,"
that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies
with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract
Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.
3.Returned for Re-submittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted, Revise and
Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal,
including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a
new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if
necessary to obtain a different action mark.
a.Do not permit submittals marked "Not Accepted, Revise and Resubmit" to
be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4.Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes,
special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action
Not Required."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CUTTING & PATCHING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 35 13/1
SECTION 01 35 13
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and
patching.
B.Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching individual parts of the Work.
1.Requirements of this Section apply to existing plumbing and electrical installations.
C.Demolition of selected portions of the building for repair is included in Section "Selective
Demolition."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is
required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of
the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed.
Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:
1.Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be
performed; indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2.Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in
the building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3.List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4.Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.
5.List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be
disrupted.
6.Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural
elements, submit details and engineering calculations to show how reinforcement
is integrated with the original structure.
Bridger Garage Repairs CUTTING & PATCHING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 35 13/2
7.Approval by the Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Engineer’s right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of the
Work found to be unsatisfactory.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1.Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching
the following structural elements:
a.Foundation construction.
b.Bearing and retaining walls.
c.Structural concrete.
d.Structural steel.
e.Lintels.
f.Timber and primary wood framing
g.Structural decking.
h.Stair systems.
i.Miscellaneous structural metals.
j.Exterior curtain wall construction.
k.Equipment supports.
l.Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.
B.Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety
related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform
as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
1.Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching
the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a.Shoring, bracing, and sheeting.
b.Primary operational systems and equipment.
c.Air or smoke barriers.
d.Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
e.Membranes and flashings.
f.Fire protection systems.
g.Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
h.Control systems.
i.Communication systems.
j.Conveying systems.
k.Electrical wiring systems.
C.Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Engineer’s opinion, reduce the building's
Bridger Garage Repairs CUTTING & PATCHING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 35 13/3
aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace
Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.If possible retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the
following categories of exposed Work, or if it is not possible to engage the
original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and
specialized firm:
a.Processed concrete finishes.
b.Stonework and stone masonry.
c.Ornamental metal.
d.Matched veneer woodwork.
e.Preformed metal panels.
f.Window wall system.
g.Stucco and ornamental plaster
h.Acoustical ceilings.
i. Terrazzo.
j.Finished wood flooring.
k.Fluid-applied flooring.
l.Carpeting.
m.Aggregate wall coating.
n.Wall covering.
o.Swimming pool finishes.
p.HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not
available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that
match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.
Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions
under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before
proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
1.Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching,
including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference
and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
Bridger Garage Repairs CUTTING & PATCHING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 35 13/4
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that
might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.
D.Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving
the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made
to bypass them.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A.General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1.Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and
patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be
retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the
original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations.
1.In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for
sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to
size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2.To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
3.Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum
saw or diamond core drill.
4.Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division-2 where cutting and
patching requires excavating and backfilling.
5.By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are
shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off pipe or
conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the
remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other
foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.
Bridger Garage Repairs CUTTING & PATCHING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 35 13/5
C.Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
1.Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2.Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
3.Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch
and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of
uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a.Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat
over entire unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has
received primer and second coat.
4.Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane
surface of uniform appearance.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as
access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is
applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/1
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS:
A.General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on
the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar
requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no
limitation on location is intended.
C.Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,"
"required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Consultant," "requested by the
Consultant," and similar phrases.
D.Approve: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Consultant's action
on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Consultant's
duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
E.Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders
issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements
within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project site, ready
for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations."
G.Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the
actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations."
H.Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use."
I.Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as
an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1.The term "experienced," when used with the term "Installer," means having a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/2
familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
2.Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain
construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of
a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that
requirements specified apply exclusively to trades persons of the corresponding
generic name.
3.Assignment of Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that
specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized
experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for
those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has
no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract
requirements remains with the Contractor.
a.This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of
building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not
intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
J.Project Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part
of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may
not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
K.Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform
specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and,
if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION:
A.Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTER
FORMAT numbering system.
B.Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular
situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:
1.Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract
Documents is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as
appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as the
sense required. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words
interpreted as singular where applicable and the context of the Contract
Documents so indicates.
2.Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the
Contractor. At certain locations in the text, for clarity, subjective language is used
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/3
to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by
others when so noted.
a.The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is
used within a sentence or phrase.
1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect
as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced.
Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
C.Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified,
and the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal,
and uncertainties to the Consultant for a decision before proceeding.
1.Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may
comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed
the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements,
indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the
context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Consultant for a decision
before proceeding.
D.Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be
familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1.Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction
activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
E.Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade
association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other
entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of
Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.
F.Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in
Contract Documents, are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses
are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up
to date as of date of Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/4
900 19th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol St., Suite 225
Washington, DC 20001 (202) 624-5800
ACI American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
1725 K St., NW
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872
AI Asphalt Institute
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, KY 40512-4052 (606) 288-4960
AIA American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 670-2400
APA American Plywood Assoc.
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc.
6288 Montrose Rd.
Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 231-9050
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council
1627 K Street, NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 452-1500
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race St.
Philadelphia, PA 19103 (215) 299-5400
AWS American Welding Society
550 LeJeune Road, NW
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/5
P.O. Box 351040
Miami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353
BANC Brick Association of North Carolina
P.O. Box 13290
Greensboro, NC 27415-3290 (919) 273-5566
BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Assoc.
355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261
BIA Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 22091 (703) 620-0010
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173 (847) 517-1200
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Assoc.
25 N. Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332-0040
HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Assoc.
1825 Michael Farraday Drive
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 22090 (703) 435-2900
IEEE Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900
NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Assoc.
Calvert Building, Suite 620
6811 Kenilworth Ave.
Riverdale, MD 20737 (301) 779-4880
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Assoc.
P.O. Box 781
Herndon, VA 22070 (703) 435-4900
NEC National Electric Code (from NFPA)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Assoc.
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-3110
NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc.
One Batterymarch Park
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/6
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (617) 770-3000
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc.
1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc.
One O'Hare Centre
6250 River Road, Suite 8030
Rosemont, IL 60018 (708) 318-6722
PCA Portland Cement Assoc.
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077 (847) 966-6200
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
175 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60604 (312) 786-0300
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
c/o Sol Baker
1106 W. 77th St., South Dr.
Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970
RMA Rubber Manufacturers Assoc.
1400 K St., NW
Washington DC 20005 (202) 682-4800
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4400 Fifth Ave.
Pittsburgh, PA 15213 (412) 268-3327
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
1760 Reston Parkway, Suite 403
Reston, VA 22090 (703) 790-9790
G.Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard or
Specification producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or
abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard or
Specification producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are
subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to
date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Corps of Engineers
(U.S. Department of the Army)
Chief of Engineers - Referral
Washington, DC 20314 (202) 272-0660
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/7
Available from the Government Printing Office
N.Capitol St. between G and H St. NW
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238
(Material is usually first published
in the "Federal Register")
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
5401 Westbard Ave.
Bethesda, MD 20816 (800) 638-2772
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 377-2000
DOC Department of Commerce
14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20230 (202) 377-2000
DOT Department of Transportation
400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460 (202) 382-2090
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
(U.S. Department of Transportation)
800 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 523-6091
PS Product Standard of NBS
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238
1.05 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES:
Bridger Garage Repairs REFERNCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 42 00/8
A.The Consultant has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain
information necessary for preparation of Contract Documents. Contact authorities
having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work.
B.Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the applicable regulations and retain at the
Project Site, available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need for such
reference.
1.06 SUBMITTALS:
A.Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and
records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations
bearing upon performance of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 45 00/1
SECTION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control
services.
B.Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports,
performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do
not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Engineer.
C.Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D.Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures,
not production of standard products.
1.Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements,
including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as
customized fabrication and installation procedures.
2.Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the
Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
3.Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the
Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES
A.Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar
quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by
governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's
responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those
specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for
Bridger Garage Repairs QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 45 00/2
these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.
1.The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform specified
quality control services.
2.The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to
perform inspections and tests specified as the Owner's responsibilities.
a.Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing
and inspection of a part of the Work, and if the Contractor is also required
to engage an entity for the same or related element, the Contractor shall
not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless otherwise agreed in
writing with the Owner.
3.Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required
inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate
compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the
original test was the Contractor's responsibility.
a.Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the
Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on
original construction.
4.Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing
required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to
permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not
limited to:
a.Providing access to the Work and furnishing labor and facilities necessary
to facilitate inspections and tests.
b.Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that
require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples.
c.Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of
samples to testing laboratories.
d.Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for
materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.
e.Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.
B.Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections, tests and similar quality
control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the
Contractor, except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility or
Bridger Garage Repairs QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 45 00/3
are provided by another identified entity.
1.The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing
laboratory or other qualified firm to perform services which are the Owner's
responsibility from the allowance set aside for testing in the contract sum.
C.Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform
inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual
Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Engineer and Contractor in performance of
its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
1.The agency shall notify the Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2.The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3.The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
D.Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and
similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required
services with a minimum of delay. In addition, the Contractor and each agency shall
coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1.The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking
samples and similar activities.
2.The contractor shall schedule pre-installation coordination meetings for key
elements in this project:
a.Pre-Concrete Coordination meeting, including owner, engineer, concrete
supplier, testing agency, and other specialty contractors/manufacturers
such as the membrane manufacturer and installer.
b.Pre-Membrane installation coordination meeting, meeting, including
owner, engineer, membrane, sealant, sealer, suppliers and manufacturer
representative, and other specialty contractors/manufacturers such as the
concrete contractor.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A.The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection,
test or similar service, to the Engineer, in duplicate, unless the Contractor is responsible
for the service. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written
report of each inspection, test or similar service through the Contractor, in duplicate.
1.Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,
Bridger Garage Repairs QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 45 00/4
when the authority so directs.
2.Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall
include, but not be limited to:
a.Date of issue.
b.Project title and number.
c.Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
d.Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e.Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f.Designation of the Work and test method.
g.Identification of product and Specification Section.
h.Complete inspection or test data.
i.Test results and an interpretations of test results.
j.Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing.
k.Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work
complies with Contract Document requirements.
l.Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m.Recommendations on retesting.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies,
including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with
"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American
Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and
tests to be performed.
1.Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the
Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,
including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract
Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
B.Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities and protect
repaired construction.
Bridger Garage Repairs QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 45 00/5
C.Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/1
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities,
construction and support facilities, security and protection.
B.Temporary utilities may include but are not limited to:
1.Water service and distribution subject to the scope of work.
2.Temporary electric power and light subject to the scope of work.
3.Telephone service if full-time project representation is required.
C.Temporary construction and support facilities may include but are not limited to:
1.Temporary heat.
2.Field offices and storage sheds.
3.Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
4.Temporary enclosures, including noise abatement to meet local ordinances.
5.Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards.
6.Waste disposal services.
7.Rodent and pest control.
8.Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D.Security and protection facilities may include but are not limited to:
1.Temporary fire protection.
2.Barricades, warning signs, lights.
3.Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site.
4.Environmental protection.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B.Implementation and Termination Schedule: Submit a schedule indicating implementation
and termination of each temporary utility within 15 days of the date established for
commencement of the Work.
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1.Building Code requirements.
2.Health and safety regulations.
3.Utility company regulations.
4.Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.
5.Environmental protection regulations.
B.Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition
Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and
Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1.Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services",
prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations.
2.Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code
(NFPA 70).
C.Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and
termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the
Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service.
B.Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.
Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not
overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous
dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used
materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use
intended.
B.Lumber and Plywood:
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/3
1.For job-built temporary offices, shops and sheds within the construction area,
provide UL labeled, fire treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing and
siding.
2.For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High Density
Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness
indicated.
3.For fences and vision barriers, provide exterior type, minimum 3/8" thick plywood.
4.For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8" thick
exterior plywood.
C.Paint: Comply with requirements of Division-9 Section "Painting."
1.For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences and other exposed lumber
and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.
2.For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss enamel
over exterior primer.
3.For interior walls of temporary offices, provide two coats interior latex flat wall
paint.
D.Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread
rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced
laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins.
E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
F. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 2-inch, chain link fabric fencing 6-feet
high with galvanized barbed wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for
line posts and 2-1/2" I.D. for corner posts.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A.General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged, previously
used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use
intended.
B.Water Hoses: Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft.
long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution
system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
C.Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion
of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with
ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/4
and equipment.
D.Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where
exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate
lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities
are in progress.
E.Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required
for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where
exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
F.Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL,
FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
G.Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction
with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and
air- conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading.
H.Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical,
aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass
fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
I.First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
J.Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for
temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-
rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA
recommended classes for the exposures.
1.Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they
will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of
the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized
use of completed permanent facilities.
3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/5
connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide
the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the
company's recommendations.
1.Arrange with the company and existing users for a time when service can be
interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2.Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility
availability, provide trucked-in services.
3.Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site, where the Owner's
easements cannot be used for that purpose.
4.Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the
Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change
Order.
B.Temporary Water Service: The contractor shall make arrangements with the Building
Management for temporary water from existing sources at the facility. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all hoses, connections, etc., required from the point of water source
at the facility.
C.Temporary Electric Power Service: The Contractor shall make all arrangements for and
shall install and pay for the temporary electric service. The Contractor shall furnish, install
and maintain all temporary and power facilities required by the work. Provide
weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters,
transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and
main distribution switch gear.
1.Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise vertically where least
exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, AC
20 ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where
overhead and exposed for surveillance.
D.Temporary Lighting:
1.Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection
requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate
illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
E.Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in
construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephone on a separate
line for each temporary office and first aid station. Where an office has more than two
occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants.
1.At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/6
F.Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove
effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used,
provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds and similar facilities. If neither
sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide
containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner.
1.Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and
similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before
discharge.
2.Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system as directed by the sewer
department officials.
3.Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition.
Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
G.Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and
subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy
rains.
3.03 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and
support facilities for easy access at locations approved by the Owner.
1.Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial
Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to the Owner.
B.Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops and sheds located within the
construction area, or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA
241.
C.Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing or
drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate
ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize
consumption of energy.
D.Heating Facilities: Except where use of the permanent system is authorized, provide
vented self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heating
units is prohibited.
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/7
E.Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel at the Project site. Keep the office clean and
orderly for use for small progress meetings. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan table and plan rack and
a 6-shelf bookcase.
2.Equip with a water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory
and mirror-medicine cabinet unit.
F.Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished and
equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility
service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or
elsewhere on the site as approved by the Owner.
G.Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures.
Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's
needs.
1.Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for
each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.
H.Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type
privies will not be permitted.
I.Drinking Water Facilities: Within temporary office, provide containerized tap-dispenser
bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply.
J.Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and
similar activities.
1.Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete,
provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment
of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2.Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials.
Close openings of 25 square feet or less with plywood or similar materials.
3.Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 square feet in area,
use UL-labeled fire-retardant treated material for framing and main sheathing.
K.Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere
daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material
and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/8
normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg
C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.
3.04 PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.Temporary Fire Protection:
1.Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable
stairwell.
2.Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3.Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire
protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit
smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.
4.Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating
units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
B.Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and
warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against.
Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
C.Security Enclosure and Lockup:
1.Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or
attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with
the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and
vandalism.
D.Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and
minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted,
or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which
produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will
minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A.Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of
temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B.Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
Bridger Garage Repairs TEMPORARY FACILITIES
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 50 00/9
1.Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2.Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing.
C.Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner requests that it be maintained longer,
remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized
use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces
and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the
Contractor.
2.Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove
materials contaminated with substances which might impair growth of plant
materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at the
temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.
3.At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been
used during the construction period, including but not limited to:
a.Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b.Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual
operating conditions.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 60 00/1
SECTION 01 60 00
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the
Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.
B.The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under
Section "Submittals."
C.Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for applicability of
industry standards to products specified.
D.Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the
Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions."
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used
in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"
"accessories," and similar terms. Such terms such are self-explanatory and have well
recognized meanings in the construction industry.
1."Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased
for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. Note that some product
specifications require job specific purchase of the materials versus use from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
a."Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name,
including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's
published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
2."Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed,
finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of
the Work.
3."Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
Bridger Garage Repairs MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 60 00/2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form
acceptable to the Engineer. Include generic names of products required. Include the
manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.
1.Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule
and the Schedule of Submittals.
2.Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item
tabulated under the following column headings:
a.Related Specification Section number.
b.Generic name used in Contract Documents.
c.Proprietary name, model number and similar designations.
d.Manufacturer's and name and address.
e.Supplier's name and address.
f.Installer's name and address.
g.Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period.
3.Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit
3 copies of an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for
omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.
a.At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product
selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract
period.
4.Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work,
submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written
explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract
requirements.
5.Engineer's Action: The Engineer will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2
weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this
time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does
not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract
Documents. The Engineer's response will include the following:
a.A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of
reasons for this action.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from
a single source.
Bridger Garage Repairs MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 60 00/3
1.When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot
produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely
manner, consult with the Engineer for a determination of the most important
product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to
visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination
has been made, select products from sources that produce products that possess
these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.
B.Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between
two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with
products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and
loss, including theft.
1.Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,
theft and other losses.
3.Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other
packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting and installing.
4.Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5.Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and
measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6.Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not
endanger the supporting construction.
7.Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION
A.General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Bridger Garage Repairs MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 60 00/4
Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of
installation.
1.Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and
other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended
use and effect.
2.Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have
been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
B.Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents
and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing
product selection include the following:
1.Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or
manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be
permitted.
2.Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions
will be permitted.
a.Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by
the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract
Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use
of an unnamed product.
3.Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or
manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not
restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose
any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with
Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for
use of an unnamed product.
4.Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product
or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and
otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
5.Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require
compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with
these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the
application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where
the product is specified for a specific application.
a.Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
Bridger Garage Repairs MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 60 00/5
6.Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only
require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product
that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
7.Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,
the Engineer’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a.Where no product available within the specified category matches
satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply
with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for
selection of a matching product in another product category, or for
noncompliance with specified requirements.
8.Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase"...as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar
phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified
requirements. The Engineer will select the color, pattern and texture from the
product line selected.
9.Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions
in Division-1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures
required for processing such selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:
A.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products
in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located
and aligned with other Work.
1.Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage
and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/1
ENGINEERSECTION 01 78 00
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout,
including but not limited to:
1.Inspection procedures.
2.Project record document submittal.
3.Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
4.Submittal of warranties.
5.Final cleaning/site demobilization of left over materials and equipment.
6.Re-installation of any existing building features temporarily removed for access to
work areas.
B.Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate
Sections.
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date
Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation
for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing
an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
a.If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete
items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not
complete.
2.Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
3.Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications and similar documents.
4.Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/2
and similar releases.
5.Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage
or settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record information.
6.Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7.Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner.
Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions.
8.Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary
facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar
elements.
9.Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and
otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
B.Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either
proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer
will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will
be issued.
1.The Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work
has been substantially completed.
2.Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
acceptance.
1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products
and completed operations where required.
2.Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
Contract Sum.
3.Submit a certified copy of the Engineer’s final inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Engineer.
4.Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and
similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/3
possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
5 Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6.Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7.Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
B.Re-inspection Procedure: The Engineer will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice
that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been
completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances
acceptable to the Engineer.
1.Upon completion of re-inspection, the Engineer will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance, or advice the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations
that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2.If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated.
1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record
documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
B.Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white prints of
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation
where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark
whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where
Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the
Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be
difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1.Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between
variations in separate categories of the Work.
2.Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on
Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3.Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
4.Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper
cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover
of each set.
C.Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including
addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/4
and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to
show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the
Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of
options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be
readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information
and Product Data.
1.Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Engineer for the
Owner's records.
D.Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these
documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with
information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention
to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily
discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record
drawings and Specifications.
1.Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the
Engineer for the Owner's records.
E.Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial
Completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the Engineer and the Owner's
personnel to determine which of the submitted Samples that have been maintained
during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes.
Comply with delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area.
F.Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements
of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete
miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed,
ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Engineer for the Owner's records.
G.Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of
manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-
covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate
identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of
information:
1.Emergency instructions.
2.Spare parts list.
3.Copies of warranties.
4.Wiring diagrams.
5.Recommended "turn around" cycles.
6.Inspection procedures.
7.Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8.Fixture lamping schedule.
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that
requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction
in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures,
provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the
following items:
1.Maintenance manuals.
2.Record documents.
3.Spare parts and materials.
4.Tools.
5.Lubricants.
6.Fuels.
7.Identification systems.
8.Control sequences.
9.Hazards.
10.Cleaning.
11.Warranties and bonds.
12.Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
B.As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1.Start-up.
2.Shutdown.
3.Emergency operations.
4.Noise and vibration adjustments.
5.Safety procedures.
6.Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7.Effective energy utilization.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and
included in Section "Temporary Facilities".
B.Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning
and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
Certification of Substantial Completion.
a.Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Bridger Garage Repairs PROJECT CLOSEOUT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 00/6
b.Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are
noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials.
c.Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free
condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore
reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete
floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d.Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess
lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary
condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e.Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and
other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains,
spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor
planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.
C.Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for
protection of the Work during construction.
D.Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety
standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in
a lawful manner.
1.Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work
have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as
directed.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 30/1
SECTION 01 78 30
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties
and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard
warranties on products and special warranties.
1.Refer to the General and/or Special Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special
warranty of workmanship and materials.
2.General closeout requirements are included in Section "Project Closeout."
3.Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations
that are specified to be warranted, may be included in the individual Sections.
4.Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to
Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B.Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the
products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to
countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
the Owner.
B.Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide
greater rights for the Owner.
1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A.Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove
and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
B.Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been
Bridger Garage Repairs WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 30/2
corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement.
The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable
adjustment for depreciation.
C.Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,
replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of
Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding
defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work
through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D.Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied
warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise
available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in
which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
1.Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to
limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
E.The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special
warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the
Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments
are willing to do so.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. If the Consultant's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a
commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the
Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the
Engineer.
1.When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the
Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,
submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within fifteen days of
completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B.When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor
and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a
draft to the Owner through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution.
C.Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written
document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or the
Contractor and subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner
through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution.
1.Refer to individual Sections for specific content requirements, and particular
Bridger Garage Repairs WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 01 78 30/3
requirements for submittal of special warranties. In general, the warranty for all
work will be five (5) years.
D.Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and
bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or
manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the
table of contents of the Project Manual.
E.Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered
loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive
8-1/2" by 11" paper.
1.Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and
the name, address and telephone number of the installer.
2.Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the
Contractor.
3.When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted
construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary,
for inclusion in each required manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES
A.Schedule: Provide a five (5) year labor and material (manufacturers) warranty on products
and installations specified in Division 3, 5, 7 and 9.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 02
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Bridger Garage Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 02 41 00/1
SECTION 02 41 00
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.DESCRIPTION
1.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and transportation necessary to do all concrete
demolition, as shown on drawings and as specified herein, including but not necessarily
limited to the following:
a.Removal of existing deteriorated concrete as noted on plans or directed by the
Engineer.
b.Removal of existing vertical and overhead concrete where directed by the Engineer.
c.Dust and water control.
d.Removal and disposal of all debris.
e.Disconnecting and relocating/reinstalling any existing utility lines on the site which
interfere with the repairs.
f.Protection of all existing electrical systems, mechanical equipment, light fixtures,
overhead piping, fire protection system etc. scheduled to remain.
2.Contractor shall provide barricades with warning lights, enclose the construction area and
take all precautions necessary to ensure public and employee safety.
3.All work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of all local and state agencies.
B.QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.Demolition Contractor's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years of experience on comparable
projects.
2.Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations which apply to this type of work and with
requirements of insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. Dispose of debris in a
legal manner off site daily. Do not allow to accumulate on site.
C.JOB CONDITIONS
1.Dust and Water Control: Contractor shall contain particular debris generated by his work
activities from polluting the atmosphere or waterways.
2.On-site burning shall not be permitted.
Bridger Garage Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 02 41 00/2
3.Use all means necessary to protect existing facilities, utilities, and appurtenances within the
project areas.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's
Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and
continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control
protection.
1.Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted
progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2.Coordinate with Owner's continuing use of portions of existing building and/or with
Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition.
C.Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with
Owner's Representative prior to start of work.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A.Occupancy: Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for
disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to
Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations.
B.Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or
structures to be demolished.
1.Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner
insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur prior to start
of selective demolition work.
C.Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
1.Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D.Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's
personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
1.Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's
personnel and general public to occupied portions of the project.
Bridger Garage Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 02 41 00/3
2.Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or
work to remain.
4.Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5.Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6.Construct temporary insulated dust resistant partitions where required to separate areas
where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dust
resistant doors and security locks.
7.Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.
8.Remove protections at completion of work.
E.Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work.
F.Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1.Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes
around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
G.Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
H.Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities in service and protect them against damage during
demolition operations.
1.Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in
writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions
to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
2.Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations.
I.Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to
limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental
protection.
Bridger Garage Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 02 41 00/4
1.Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.Use appropriate materials and proper equipment to complete the work of this Section. Provide
all necessary barricades, warning devices, enclosures, etc. as required to comply with governing
safety regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
1.Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure
appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is
made for continuing operations.
2.Cover and protect equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work
is performed in areas where such items have not been removed.
3.Erect and maintain dust resistant partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of
dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.
a.Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the
building, construct dust resistant partitions of minimum 4-inch studs and ½-inch fire-
retardant plywood on demolition side.
b.Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.
4.Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.
a.Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied
areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown
of service is necessary during changeover.
3.02 DEMOLITION
A.General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as
required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and
governing regulations.
1.Demolish concrete in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with
Bridger Garage Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 02 41 00/5
construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-
driven impact tools.
2.Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid
imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
3.Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Engineer in written format with accurate details. Pending receipt of
directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to
continue overall job progress without undue delay.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition
operations. Transport and legally dispose off site.
1.If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection
against exposure or environmental pollution.
2.Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.04 CLEANUP AND REPAIR
A.General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished
materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
1.Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction
and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent
construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 03
CONCRETE
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 20 00/1
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A.Furnish, fabricate and install reinforcement and associated items required or indicated on
the drawings for cast-in-place concrete, including, but not necessarily limited to,
conventional and epoxy-coated bars, welded wire fabric, ties, and supports.
1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.Furnishing and placement of inserts, anchorages, and other embedded items as specified in
other sections.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Unless otherwise shown or specified, fabrication and placement of all concrete
reinforcement and related items shall conform to the following codes and standards:
1.American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, "Building Code Requirement for Reinforced
Concrete."
2.American Concrete Institute, ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures."
3.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice."
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedule, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent
bars, arrangements and assemblies, for the fabrication and placement of concrete
reinforcement.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Delivery: Deliver reinforcement to the Project Site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use
metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings
shown on placement diagrams.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 20 00/2
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during, and
after installation and to protect the materials and installed work of all trades. Take all
necessary precautions to maintain identification of fabricated bars after bundles are
broken.
Storage: Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and
accumulation of dirt or excessive rust. Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars shall be stored on
protective cribbing.
Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars: Coating damage due to handling, shipment and placing
need not be repaired where the damaged area is 0.1 square inches or smaller; damaged
areas larger than 0.1 square inches shall be repaired with Section 2.01 C; the maximum
amount of damage including repaired and unrepaired areas shall not exceed 2 percent of
the surface area of each bar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. Weldable bars shall be ASTM A706.
B.Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A82 and ASTM A185. (EPOXY COATED)
C.Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775. When required, damaged epoxy coating shall
be repaired with patching material conforming to ASTM A775 and done in accordance with
the material manufacturer's recommendations. Reinforcing bars to be coated shall
conform to Section 2.01-A.
D.Bar Supports: Bar supports and spacing of same shall be per recommendations set forth by
Chapter 3 of the "CRSI Manual of Standard Practice." Epoxy coated reinforcing bars
supported from formwork shall rest on coated wire bar supports, or on bar supports made
of dielectric material or other acceptable materials. Wire bar supports shall be coated with
dielectric material, compatible with concrete, for a minimum distance of 2 inches from the
point of contact with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. Reinforcing bars used as support bars
shall be epoxy-coated.
E.Tie Wire: Wire shall be 16 gauge or heavier, black-annealed. Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars
shall be tied with plastic coated, epoxy coated, or nylon-coated tie wire or other acceptable
materials.
F.For epoxy grouting reinforcing steel use the Hilti “HIT RE 500 System” supplied by Hilti
Fastening Systems, “Dowel Fast” System by Powers Fasteners, or approved equal. Follow
manufacturer's directions for installation and required surface preparation.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.General Requirements: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and
dimensions, with fabrication to tolerances complying with CRSI Manual of Standard
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 20 00/3
Practice. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a
manner that will injure or weaken the material.
B.Unacceptable Workmanship: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be
permitted in the work:
1.Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
2.Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings.
3.Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
C.When epoxy-coated reinforcing bars are cut in the field, the ends of the bars shall be
coated with the same material used for repair of coating damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.General Requirements:
1.All reinforcing bars shall be placed in accordance with CRSI "Recommended
Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars."
2.Bars shall be placed to the tolerance specified in ACI 318
3.Place all reinforcement according to the approved placement drawings. Use
sufficient bar supports, tie anchors, additional reinforcing bars, if required, and
other accessories to hold all bars securely in place.
B.Concrete Coverage: Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages specified on
the drawings for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar
supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during
concrete placement operation. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from
exposed concrete surfaces.
C.Cleaning Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it,
shall be free from loose rust and mill scale, oil, grease, paint, earth, ice and all coatings,
which would reduce or destroy bond between steel and concrete. Clean reinforcement as
necessary prior to, during, or after placement to achieve this result. When bars project
from construction joints, all cement mortar clinging to the bars from previous concreting
shall be removed before the ensuing enveloping concrete is placed.
3.02 REINFORCING BAR LAP SPLICES
A.New slab reinforcing bars may be spliced to existing bars by lapped splices if adequate
lengths of exposed existing bars are available. Provide reinforcement lap splices by placing
bars in contact and tying with wire tightly. Comply with the requirements of Engineering
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 20 00/4
Data Report Number 45, ‘Tension Development and Lap Splice Lengths of Reinforcing Bars
Under ACI 318 for minimum required length of bar for lap splices. Alternatively, the
contractor can follow the values provided below for lap splice lengths based on the
following guidelines:
LAP SPLICE LENGTHS FOR BARS IN TENSION (IN INCHES)
Bar Size Uncoated Reinforcement Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement
3 19 22
4 19 28
5 24 35
6 28 42
7 41 61
8 47 70
Note 1. Based on Class B splice = 1.3 ld (ld = tensile development length) Normal
weight concrete
f’c= 5,000 psi min.
Grade 60 reinforcement
Concrete cover = 1.5 n. or greater
Bars have less than 12 in. concrete cast below them.
Note 2. Lap splice lengths for epoxy-coated steel based on concrete cover equal to
or greater than 3 bar diameters and clear spacing between bars equal to
or greater than 6 bar diameters.
B.Do not make splices at points of maximum stress if possible.
C.Stagger top splices, and in horizontal wall reinforcement separate at least five feet
longitudinally in alternate bars of opposite tiers.
D.Stubs and dowels required to receive and engage subsequent work shall extend a sufficient
length to develop the strength of the bar. Place dowel and stub bars in the forms and
secure against displacement during the placing of concrete. Where stub steel and dowels
extend through construction joints in walls, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of adhering
particles of concrete, before continuing the placing of any subsequent concrete.
E.Where splicing length is insufficient either additional concrete removal or mechanical bar
splicing shall be implemented at the direction of the Engineer.
3.03 REINFORCING BAR MECHANICAL SPLICES
A.Bars to be spliced by the mechanical splicing process shall be free of paint, oil, rust, scale or
other foreign material. The splice shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The mechanical splice shall meet full tension requirement of 100% of the yield strength (fy).
The mechanical splices shall be performed using the Quick Wedge system manufactured
by Erico Products, Inc. (800)248-2677, MBT Bar Lock System (800) 755-4888, or approved
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 20 00/5
equal.
Test assemblies shall include the same bars, couplers and anchors. The same equipment
shall be used to make these assemblies as to be used on the project.
B. Unskilled operators must be trained and indoctrinated by an authorized representative of
the system manufacturer. Upon satisfactory completion of the training, a certificate will be
issued by the system manufacturer to show the splicer’s name, badge, number/Social
Security Number and date certified.
C. Test splices should be made on the size, type and grade of rebar to be used in production.
If a change of size, type of grade or rebar occurs, new test results should be obtained.
Minimum rebar deformation heights and spacing within the splice must conform to the
requirements of ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 as appropriate. If minimum deformation
heights and spacing requirements cannot be satisfied, the system’s manufacturer may at its
option offer and get an approval for alternate splicing procedure to meet the specified
splicing strength requirements.
D. The frequency of test splices shall be as follows:
First Fifty (50) - One Test
Next Fifty (50) - One Test
Thereafter, every one hundred (100) - One Test
The test splice shall be a SISTER SPLICE (removable splice made in-place and in sequence
adjacent to production splices by the same operator and under same conditions.)
Separate test frequencies are not necessary to horizontal, vertical and diagonal splices.
E. If any splice used for testing fails to meet the design code strength requirements, two
splices in-place shall be cut from the previous lot and tested. If these sister splices fail, the
contractor shall at his own expense, test as many splices as directed by the Engineer and
re-splice all test and failed splices.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/1
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, mix design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A.This work shall consist of full/partial depth removal (using acceptable methods) of
deteriorated concrete at locations indicated on the drawings and placing new structural
concrete with low water-cementitious material ratio, fiber-reinforcement, air-entrainment,
flyash according to the specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.Product data for proprietary materials and items, including forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, bonding grout/agent, joint systems, curing compounds,
and others as requested by Engineer.
C.The Contractor shall submit ACI 318 concrete mix proportioning data with compressive
strength test results to the Engineer for approval.
D.The Testing Agency shall submit test results of cylinders for each day's testing.
E.The Contractor shall submit the proposed pouring sequence and construction joint layout
for approval by the Engineer.
F.Minutes of pre-concrete conference.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/2
1.ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete," or AASHTO
specifications.
2.ACI 562 “Code Requirements for Assessment, Repair, and Rehabilitation of Existing
Concrete Structures and Commentary”
3.ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete.”
4.ACI 117, “Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.”
5.ACI 311.4R, “Guide for Concrete Inspection.”
6.ACI 304, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.”
7.ACI 305R, “Hot Weather Concreting.”
8.ACI 306.1, “Cold Weather Concreting.”
9.ACI 309R, “Guide for Consolidation of Concrete”
10.ASTM C 33, Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
11.ASTM C 94, Standard Specifications for Ready Mix Concrete.
12.ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual.
13.ACI SP-15, ACI Field Reference Manual.
14.American Welding Society AWS D1.4-1998 “Recommended Practices forWelding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced
Concrete Construction.
15.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute “Manual of Standard Practice
B.Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress
of work. Retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
C.Pre-Concrete Conference: Conduct coordination meeting at Project site to comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section 013300 - Submittals, and Section 014500 - Quality
Control Services.
D.At the onset of the project start or at least 15 days prior to the first concrete pour, the
contractor shall conduct a meeting to review the proposed mix designs and to discuss the
required methods and procedures necessary to achieve the required concrete quality. The
meeting will review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and
availability of materials. It will also establish preliminary work progress schedule and
procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete should attend the meeting, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.Contractor's superintendent.
2.Laboratory responsible for concrete design mixes.
3.Laboratory responsible for field quality control.
4.Ready-mix concrete producer.
5.Concrete subcontractor, if any.
6.Primary admixture manufacturers.
7.Engineer or Owner's representative.
The minutes shall include a statement by the concrete contractor indicating that the
proposed mix design and placing techniques will produce the concrete quality required by
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/3
these specifications.
1.06 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A.The Contractor shall have a minimum of five years of experience in performing work similar
to that shown in the drawings and specifications.
B.The Contractor may be requested to submit a list of five projects in which similar work to
that specified was successfully completed. This list shall contain the following for each of
the five projects.
1.Project Name
2.Owner of Project
3.Owner's Representative, Address and Telephone Number
4.Brief Description of Work
5.Cost of Portion of Work Similar to that Specified in this Section
6.Total Restoration Cost of Project
7.Date of Completion
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Requirements
1.Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or
when the mean daily temperatures are below 40 degrees F., follow
requirements of ACI 306.1 and recommendations of ACI 306R as modified
herein. Maintain concrete temperature at a minimum of 55 degrees F. for
sections having a minimum dimension of less than 12", or 50 degrees F. for
sections having a minimum dimension of 12" or greater, for not less than 72
hours after depositing.
2.Maintain temperature of concrete record during the required minimum
protection period and as described in this Section.
3.The specified non-chloride accelerator or high-early strength Type III cement
may be used when accepted by the Engineer. Site-cured cylinders for
verification of early strength and/or the adequacy of the Contractor's protective
methods, may be required by the Engineer
4.Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow
recommendations of ACI 305R as modified herein. The temperature of
concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Protect to
prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible when the
temperature is expected to exceed 90 degrees F. Contractor shall obtain
acceptance from the Engineer of the procedures to be used in protecting,
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/4
depositing, finishing, and curing the concrete. The specified water reducing
retarding admixture may be used upon acceptance of the Engineer. The use of
continuous wetting or fog sprays may be required by the Engineer for 24 hours
after depositing.
1.08 Special Inspection
See Structural Drawings for requirements for Special Inspections required to be
performed by Code for the work of this Section. Such work shall be performed by a
qualified testing agency contracted by the Owner. Written reports of inspections shall
be submitted as specified herein within one week following inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A.Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: N/A
B.Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
C.Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
D.Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties,
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface.
1.Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter
in concrete surface.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I , II or III non air-entraining, of recent manufacture
and free of lumps.
1.Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to
Engineer.
2.Pozzolanic materials (fly ash or slag) may be substituted for a portion of the
cement when reviewed and approved by the Engineer or Owner’s representative.
Submittals must indicate testing to prove its suitability in combination with the
intended cement and aggregate.
3.Additional, sustained moist curing of the concrete is required when pozzolans are
used.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/5
B.Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C-33 class 67 and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. Coarse aggregates shall be clean,
sound crushed stone or crushed gravel. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 3/4
inch. No chert shall be permitted.
C.Water: Potable water.
D.Sand: ASTM C-33. Sand shall be clean and sharp.
E.Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that are free from chloride ions.
F.Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C-260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other required admixtures.
1.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a."Air-Mix" or "AEA-92," Euclid Chemical Co.
b."Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co.
c. "MaterAir VR10" BASF Building Systems
d."Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc.
e."Sika AER," Sika Corp.
G.Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a."Eucon WR-75," “WAR-91” or “Eucon MR,” Euclid Chemical Co.
b."WRDA with Hycol," or “Daracem 65,” W.R. Grace & Co.
c."Pozzolith 322” or “Polyheed 997,” BASF Building Systems
d."Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp.
H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer):
ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
1.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/6
a."Eucon 37," “Eucon 1037,” or “Plastol 5000,” Euclid Chemical Co.
b."WRDA 19" or "Daracem 100," W.R. Grace & Co.
c."Rheobuild 1000," BASF Building Systems
d."Sikament 300," Sika Corp.
I.Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a."Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co.
b."Daratard-17," W.R. Grace & Co.
d."MasterSet–R-100" BASF Building Systems
e."Plastiment," Sika Corporation.
J.Certification: Written conformance to the above-mentioned requirements and the
chloride ion content of admixtures will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior
to mix design review by the Engineer.
K.Synthetic Macro-Fiber Reinforcement:
1.Available Products: Subject to ASTM C1116-02 and ASTM C1018-97.
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.Nycon Nylon Fibers.
b.Forta Nylo-Mono Nylon Fibers or Mighty-Mono Polypropylene Fibers.
c.Fibermesh Fibermix Stealth Polypropylene Fibers.
d.Grace Polypropylene Fibers or Polypropylene Microfibers.
e.Euclid Fiberstrand 150, Fiberstrand 200 or Fiberstrand 150 ML.
f.Axim Fibrasol or Fibrasol IIP.
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A.Reglets: Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are
terminated in reglets, fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
B.Moisture-Retaining Cover: Burlap and plastic complying with ASTM C 171.
C.Moist Curing: Curing shall be accomplished by wet curing only. A curing membrane shall
only be used in floor areas if approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner’s
representative.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/7
D.Liquid Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC compliant, 350 g/l): The compound shall have
30% solids content minimum and will have a maximum moisture loss of 0.039 grams/cm2
when applied at a coverage rate of 250 ft2/gallon. Product shall be “Super Aqua-Cure
VOX,” or “Super Diamond Clear VOX” by the Euclid Chemical Co.
or
Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC compliant, 700 g/l): Liquid type membrane-forming
curing compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type I, Class B,
25% solids content minimum. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.30 Kg/m2 when
applied at 300 sq. ft./gal. Manufacturer’s certification is required. Subject to project
requirements provide one of the following products: “Super Rez Seal” by the Euclid
Chemical Company, “MasterKure CC 1315” by Master Builders or “MasterKure CC 300 XS”
by BASF Building Systems.
2.04 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A.Prepare design mixes for concrete by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as
specified in ACI 301, Section 4.2.3. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the
Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be
the same as used for field quality control testing.
B.Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix at least 15 days prior to start
of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed
and approved by the Engineer. All mix designs shall be submitted on a Mix Design
Submittal Form.
C.Design mix to provide structural concrete with the following properties at 28 days;
a.F’c =5000-psi 28-day compressive strength, structural normal weight 145 pcf; Max W/C
ratio = 0.4 maximum; max slump = 4” prior to addition of super plasticizer; air
entrainment: 6.5% +/- 1%, macro fibers reinforced @ dosage rate of of 1.5 lbs/cu.yd; Class
F or C flyash shall not exceed 20% be weight of cement;
b.Shrinkage length change of superstructure concrete shall be per ASTM C157 modifiedtest. Drying shrinkage length change shall not exceed 0.04 percent at 28 days.
c.Tests of proposed mixes for water soluble chloride ion content for all above grade
structural concrete reinforced concrete in accordance with ASTM C1218. An initial
evaluation of the chloride ion content of the proposed concrete mixture shall be
obtained by testing individual concrete ingredients for total chloride ion content.
Maximum water soluble chloride ion content in concrete by percent of weight of
cement shall not exceed the following 0.15
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A.Use high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete for placement and
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/8
workability.
B.Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having total air content of 6.0% with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.0
percent.
C.Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
D.Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of
placement as follows:
1.3 inches plus or minus ½ inch, prior to addition of superplasticizing admixture.
2.Not more than 8 inches final slump after addition of superplasticizing admixture.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING
A.Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
introduced.
B.Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1.When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C),
reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air
temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01. PREPARATION
A.Remove concrete members as indicated on the drawing. The removal of concrete shall be
performed using approved methods and prepare the concrete surfaces to receive new
concrete as shown on plans and as directed by the engineer in the field.
3.02 FORMS
A.General:
1.The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings for form work for examination by
the Engineer. If such drawings are not satisfactory to the Engineer, the Contractor
shall make such changes in them as may be required, but it is understood that the
Engineer's examination of the drawings as submitted or corrected shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for obtaining satisfactory results.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/9
2. All forms shall be so constructed and maintained that the finished concrete will be
true to line and grade and of the shape and dimensions shown on the Plans. The
forms shall be constructed so that they can be removed without injury to the
concrete.
3. Forms shall be mortar-tight, sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion due to the wet
concrete mix and other loads incident to construction operations, including
vibration, and so constructed and maintained to prevent warping and opening of
the joints due to shrinkage of the form material. Molding strips shall be placed in
the corners of forms so as to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed
concrete corners.
4. The interior of forms shall be treated with a non-staining form oil before concrete
is placed to prevent adhesion of the concrete to the form.
5. All lumber in contact with concrete shall be free from knot holes, loose knots,
cracks, splits, warps or any other defects which would mark the appearance of the
finished structure. Any lumber which had defects affecting its strength shall not be
used.
6. In designing forms, concrete shall be considered as a liquid weighing 150 pounds
per cubic foot for vertical loads and for computing the hydrostatic head for
horizontal pressure. In addition, a live load allowance of 50 pounds per square
foot shall be used on horizontal projections of surfaces. Forms shall be designed so
that no member will develop a dead load deflection of more than 1/270th of the
span.
7. Spreader blocks and non "stay-in-place" bracing shall be removed from forms
before concrete is placed. In no case, shall any portion of wood be left in the
concrete.
B. Forms for Permanently Exposed Surfaces:
1. Forms for concrete surfaces that will be permanently exposed to view shall be
constructed of plywood or of metal panels. Wood or metal linings for forms shall
be of such kind and quality, or shall be so treated or coated, that there will be no
chemical deterioration or discoloration of the formed concrete surface. The type
and condition of form linings, and the construction of the forms, shall be such that
form surfaces will be even and uniform.
2. Plywood sheets less than five-eighth inch in thickness shall be placed against a solid
wood backing of three-quarter inch sheathing. Plywood sheets five-eighth inch or
more in thickness may be used without backing, provided the forms are
constructed to withstand pressure developed during placing of concrete without
producing visible waviness between studs. Plywood sheets shall be placed so that
joints are tight and with the long dimension horizontal.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/10
3. Metal for forms shall be of such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape.
Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices shall be such that they will hold the
forms rigidly together in place and allow removal without injury to the concrete.
Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be
used. All metal forms shall be kept free from rust, grease, or other foreign material
which would discolor the concrete.
4. Form panels, either of wood or metal, shall be constructed and assembled so as to
result in tight joints between the panels.
C. Form Anchorage:
1. Forms shall be securely tied together with approved rods, and braced in a
substantial and unyielding manner. In general, tie rods shall be designed to also
act as struts or spreader. Wood struts will not be permitted to remain in the
concrete.
2. For concrete surfaces that will be permanently exposed to view, metal ties or
anchorages within the forms shall be constructed so as to permit their removal to a
depth of at least one and one-half inches from the face without injury to the
concrete. The cavities on both sides of the concrete resulting from the removal of
the end of form ties shall be filled with dry-pack Portland cement mortar having
the same proportions of cement and sand as the mortar in the body of the
concrete. The surface of the filling shall be left sound, smooth and even and shall
match, insofar as practicable, the color of the surrounding concrete.
3. Devices which, when removed, will leave an opening entirely through the concrete
will not be permitted. Wire ties shall not be used. Any parts of metal supports or
spacers for reinforcement that are left in place within one and one-half inches of
an exposed surface of the concrete shall be of non-rusting metal or have a non-
rusting coating. If such parts are galvanized, the weight of zinc coating shall
average not less than two ounces per square foot of actual surface.
D. Inspection of Forms:
1. All dimensions of forms in place shall be carefully checked before concrete is
placed. Immediately prior to placing concrete, any warpings or bulging shall be
corrected and all dirt, sawdust, shavings or other debris removed. In narrow walls
where the bottom of the forms are otherwise inaccessible, the lower boards or
panels shall be left loose on the back side so that extraneous material can be
removed just prior to placing concrete.
2. If during placing of the concrete, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, they
shall be properly realigned and securely braced, and, if necessary to make proper
correction, the portion of the concrete affected shall be removed.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/11
3. When forms are unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during the placing of
concrete, the placing shall be suspended until the defects are corrected.
4. If the forms develop any defects, such as bulging, sagging, leakage or irregular
surfaces after the concrete has been poured, that portion of the work shall be
removed, reconstructed or repaired as directed by the Engineer without additional
compensation to the Contractor.
3.03 PLACING FINISHING AND CURING:
A. Bonding Grout:
1. After the existing concrete surface has been cleaned, it shall be uniformly
saturated by pre-wetting for 2 hours minimum. Surface must be wet to saturated
surface dry (SSD) condition, and any freestanding water shall be completely
removed prior to placing the bonding grout. Immediately before placing concrete,
a thin coating of bonding grout shall be scrubbed into the properly prepared
surface of the existing concrete. Proper workmanship shall be exercised to insure
that all existing surfaces receive a thorough, even coating and that no excess grout
is permitted to collect in pockets. The rate of progress in applying grout shall be
limited so that the grout does not become dry before it is covered with new
concrete.
2. Bonding grout for patching concrete to existing concrete shall consist of equal
parts by weight of Portland Cement and sand mixed in a portable mechanical
mixer with sufficient water to form a stiff slurry. The consistency of this slurry shall
be such that it can be applied with a stiff brush or broom to the old concrete in a
thin, even coating that will not run or puddle in low spots.
3. Should the bonding grout dry before the concrete is placed, the Contractor will
remove the dried grout and sandblast clean the grouted surface, at his expense,
before placing fresh bonding grout.
4. When the method of concrete removal includes hydromilling or hydrodemolition,
the requirements for the use of bonding grout may be waived. Prepared surfaces
shall be clean and free of laitance, foreign material and any debris encountered
during surface preparation. Do not allow cement to dry and re-adhere on the
surfaces. The surface shall be uniformly saturated by wetting for 4 hours (min.)
Surface will be saturated surface dry (SSD) condition, and any free standing water
shall be completely removed prior to concrete placement. No free moisture or
puddles on the surface will be permitted or accepted.
B. Placing and finishing: After the bonding grout has been applied, concrete shall be placed,
consolidated by vibration, and shall be finished by screening and bull floating to bring the
finished surface to specified elevation. The surface shall then receive a medium broom
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/12
finish, as directed by the Engineer. The reinforcing steel shall have a minimum concrete
cover as shown on plans. The finished concrete shall be suitably protected, until the
completion of the required curing period. Provide tooled joints between new and existing
concrete surfaces.
C. Curing: The recommendations of ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete, shall be
followed. When water is required to wet the surface of the newly placed concrete, it shall
be applied as a fine spray so that it will not mark or pond on the surface. Except where
otherwise specified, the curing period shall be at least 72 hours. If high early strength
concrete is approved by the Engineer, the curing period may be reduced as directed by the
Engineer. If fly ash or slag is approved in the mix by the Engineer, the curing time will be
extended. Curing shall be accomplished by wet curing only. The curing and sealing
compound shall only be used on floor and slab areas approved by the Engineer.
1. The surface of the newly poured concrete shall be covered with wetted burlap as
soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring of the surface.
The burlap shall overlap six inches. At least two layers of wetted burlap shall be
placed on the finished surface. The burlap shall be kept saturated by means of a
mechanically operated sprinkling system. In place of the sprinkling system, two
layers of burlap may be substituted for one layer of burlap and impermeable
covering.
The burlap sheets shall be placed so that they are in contact with the vertical faces
of concrete slabs after removal of slab forms, and that portion of the material in
contact with those faces shall be kept saturated with water.
2. Membrane Curing Method. Membrane curing will not be permitted unless
approved in writing by the Engineer. Concrete at these locations shall be cured by
another method as specified above.
After the concrete has been finished, the surface shall be cured with the specified
curing compound. The seal shall be maintained for the specified curing period.
The vertical faces of concrete slabs shall, likewise, be sealed immediately after the
forms are removed. This high solids curing and sealing compound shall be applied
at a maximum coverage rate of 250 square feet per gallon. These applications
shall be made with mechanical equipment.
At locations where the coating is discontinuous or where pin holes show or where
the coating is damaged due to any cause and on areas adjacent to sawed joints,
immediately after sawing is completed, an additional coating of membrane curing
compound shall be applied at the rate of one gallon per 250 square feet.
3. The Engineer may order curing by another method specified herein if
unsatisfactory results are obtained with a curing compound. Prior to starting The
Work, the Contractor shall have available, at the site of The Work, supply of one of
the other approved curing materials sufficient for curing one day's production.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/13
4.The Contractor's construction operations including the management of traffic, shall
be such as to avoid damage to the coatings of curing compound for period of not
less than the curing period specified. Any curing compound that is damaged or
that peels from the concrete surface within the curing period specified, shall be
repaired by the Contractor without delay and in an approved manner. No
additional compensation will be allowed to the Contractor for performance of this
work.
3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A.General: Formwork may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10
deg C) for 72 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
3.05 REUSE OF FORMS
A.Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B.When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid
offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to
Engineer.
3.06 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with bonding grout or
proprietary repair products immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to
Engineer.
1.Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes
left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less
than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with
specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding grout has dried.
2.For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland
cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surface texture of
surrounding concrete. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify
mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B.Repair of Concrete Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/14
defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include
color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins
and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be
removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement
cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1.Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect
the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace
concrete.
3.07 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.General: The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test
reports.
B.Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the
following, as directed by Engineer.
C.Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C
94.
1.Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each truck delivering the
concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
2.Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
truck of air-entrained concrete.
3.Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and
below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression
test specimens is made.
4.Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 6 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are
required.
5.Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds of each concrete class placed in any
one day; one specimen tested at 3 days, two specimen tested at 7 days, 2
specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing
if required.
6.When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class
of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from
each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE WORK
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 30 00/15
7.When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Engineer
may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
8.When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
9.Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
D.Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and
Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain
the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive
breaking strength, and type of break for 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
E.Nondestructive 3-day Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
F.Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been
attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing service may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other
methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is
verified.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIRS USING HIGH STRENGTH, FAST-SETTING MATERIALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 31 24/2
SECTION 03 31 24
CONCRETE REPAIR USING HIGH STRENGTH, FAST-SETTING MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this section
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work shall consist of the removal of existing deteriorated concrete and the installation
of a fast-setting, high-strength concrete in slabs, beams and at locations shown in drawings
and in horizontal surfaces to be re-opened to traffic in a very short duration or as
designated by the Engineer. Materials in this specification may also be appropriate when
the scope of concrete work is limited and it is not practical to use ready-mixed concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The fast-setting concrete repairs must achieve a compressive strength of 3,500 psi or safely
accept vehicular traffic within 3 hours of placement.
B. The concrete shall resist freeze/thaw damage and scaling in compliance with ASTM Test
Procedures C-666 and C-672. The products approved under this section shall be:
1. "MasterEmaco T 1060" as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
2. "MasterEmaco T 415 or T 430" as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
3. “VersaSpeed 100” as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company
(www.EuclidChemical.com)
4. “SikaQuick 1000 or 2500” as manufactured by Sika Corporation
(www.sikausa.com)
Note: Products related to those above with extended working times may be acceptable at the
discretion of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIRS USING HIGH STRENGTH, FAST-SETTING MATERIALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 31 24/3
A. The exact location of spalled concrete to be repaired will be determined in the field by
tapping of slab with a sounding rod, chain drag or hammer. An outline of the area to be
repaired will be marked with chalk.
B. The areas of the spalled concrete to be removed will be outlined by making a sawcut
around the perimeter of the spalled area. The nominal depth of sawcut shall be 1/2 inch.
Do not, under any circumstances, cut existing reinforcing bars or post-tensioning strands.
C. All loose unsound concrete shall be removed with pneumatic or electric jack hammer
weighing no more than 15 lbs. may be used for removing concrete around mild steel
reinforcement. Where unsound concrete is below reinforcement, removal to 3/4 inch
below reinforcement is required.
D. All deteriorated reinforcing steel bars which have lost more than 20% (or more) of their
cross-sectional areas or selected by the Engineer shall be replaced. New reinforcing steel
bars shall be furnished and placed in accordance with Section 03200 of the technical
specifications and under the directions of the Engineer.
E. The deck surface shall be blown clean with compressed air to assure that all loose or hollow
concrete is removed. The reinforcing steel shall be sand blasted to remove all rust.
3.02 PLACING, FINISHING AND CURING
A. Place and properly mixed concrete into the prepared area from one side to the other. Do
not place concrete in lifts. Work the material firmly into the bottom and sides of the patch
to assure good bond. Do not re-temper or finish material after initial set.
B. For maximum performance and minimal shrinkage, wet curing shall be performed for a
minimum of 3 hours followed by the application of an approved curing compound.
3.03 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
This work will be measured for payment in square feet. The quantity of repair area will be
computed from areas marked by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIRS USING TROWEL APPLIED MORTAR
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 37 15/1
SECTION 03 37 15
CONCRETE REPAIR USING TROWEL APPLIED MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. This work shall consist of the removal of existing unsound concrete to required depth and
the installation of a trowel applied, fast-setting cement repair material in slabs, beams and
columns and at locations indicated on drawings and/or at other locations designated by the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The fast-setting polymer repair mortar shall achieve a compressive strength of 5,000 psi in
28 days. The products approved under this section are as follows.
1. "MasterEmaco T310 CI", "MasterEmaco N400 RS or N400" or “MasterEmaco
N425” as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
2. "SikaTop-123 Plus or SikaQuick VOH" as manufactured by Sika Corporation
sikausa.com)
3. “Verticoat or Verticoat Supreme” as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical
Company (www.euclidchemical.com)
4. “CT-40” as manufactured by J.E. Tomes & Associates (www.jetomes.com)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATIONS:
A. All loose and unsound concrete shall be removed with small chipping hammers. Remove
concrete a minimum of 3/4" beyond the reinforcing steel.
B. The surface shall be blown clean with compressed air to assure that all loose and hollow
concrete is removed. The reinforcing steel shall be sandblasted to remove all rust.
3.02 PLACING, FINISHING AND CURING (Trowel Applied Mortar):
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIRS USING TROWEL APPLIED MORTAR
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 37 15/2
A. Apply patching material as follows and in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Saturate the surface with water and allow to dry so that there is no standing water and the
surface maintains a dark gray color one half hour before placing.
C. Scratch a base coat firmly into the dampened surface and apply the balance of the patch
before base coat is allowed to dry. Consolidate the mortar for density. For deep patches,
add recommended filler and apply the material in lifts, allowing it to stiffen enough
between lifts to support its own weight. For repairs over 4 inches deep, steel ties shall be
provided to aid in weight support. Maximum filler addition to be 1 part filler to 2 parts by
volume. The surface shall be troweled and brushed to match surrounding concrete.
D. The finished patch shall be cured for at least forty eight hours. Keep damp with water or
coat with a water-based curing and sealing compound conforming to ASTM C1315 as
recommended by the polymer repair mortar manufacturer.
E. In hot weather, the surface shall be kept cool by shading. Use cold liquid for mixing. Work
material rapidly since heat accelerates set. Cure immediately. In cold weather, do not
make repair if temperature is expected to fall below freezing within 48 hours of placing.
The patches must be kept at a minimum of 60 degrees F. for seventy-two hours for proper
curing.
3.03 TESTING:
A. The patched areas shall be sounded with a chain drag and/or hammer after 7 days after
concrete placement; any hollowness detected shall be corrected by the Contractor by
removing and replacing the patch at no extra cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIR USING FORM AND PUMP MATERIALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 37 16/1
SECTION 03 37 16
CONCRETE REPAIR USING FORM AND PUMP MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and all Divisions of the Specifications apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work shall consist of the removal of existing unsound concrete to required depth and
the installation of a prepackaged pump and pour repair material in slabs, beams and
columns and at locations indicated on drawings and/or at other locations designated by the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The pump and pour repair material shall achieve a minimum compressive strength of 5,000
psi in 28 days. The products approved under this section are as follows.
1. “MasterEmaco S477 CI, MasterEmaco S440 and S440 CI” as manufactured by BASF
Building Systems (www.buildingsystems.basf.com).
2. “Sikacrete 211 SCC Plus or SikaTop 111 Plus” as manufactured by Sika Corporation
(www.sikausa.com).
3. “FormFlo P-38 or FormFlo P-51” as manufactured by J.E. Tomes & Associates
(www.jetomes.com).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
A. Saw cut the perimeter of the repair area to a nominal depth of 1/2”. Take precautions in
areas likely to contain top reinforcing not to cut any reinforcing steel or post-tensioning
strands.
B. All loose and unsound concrete shall be removed with small chipping hammers to provide
a minimum ¼” substrate profile. Remove concrete a minimum of 3/4" beyond the
reinforcing steel.
C. The surface shall be blown clean with compressed air to assure that all loose and hollow
concrete is removed. The reinforcing steel shall be sandblasted to remove all rust. All
measures must be taken to prevent flash rusting from occurring to the reinforcing steel.
Bridger Garage Repairs CONCRETE REPAIR USING FORM AND PUMP MATERIALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 37 16/2
D.Forms shall be watertight. Apply a suitable form release to the forms.
3.02 PLACING, FINISHING, AND CURING
A.Apply repair material as follows and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.Mix the repair material according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Follow the
manufacturer’s guidelines for extending the repair mortar by adding aggregate if required.
C.Saturate the surface with water and allow to dry so that there is no standing water and the
surface maintains a dark gray color one half hour before placing.
D.Vibrate form while pumping repair material using a variable pressure pump. Do not
overpump so that the forms deflect.
E.Cure the repaired area as recommended by the repair mortar manufacturer.
3.03 TESTING
A.The patched areas shall be sounded with a hammer after 7 days after concrete placement;
any hollowness detected shall be corrected by the Contractor by removing and replacing
the patch at no extra cost to the Owner. The contractor shall provide access, at their
expense, for the Engineer to sound all repaired areas.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 23/1
SECTION 03 64 23
PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, equipment, and labor required to
epoxy inject cracks at locations shown on drawings and where the cement aggregate
cement bond is lost or fractured or as directed by the Engineer.
1.03 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall have a minimum of three years of experience performing work similar
to that shown in the drawings and specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit a list of five projects in which similar work to that specified
herein was successfully completed. The list shall contain the following for each of the five
projects:
1. Project Name
2. Owner of Project
3. Owner's Representative, Address and Telephone Number
4. Brief Description of Work
5. Cost of Portion of Work Similar to that specified in this Section
6. Total Restoration Cost of Project
7. Date of Completion of Work
D. A full-time on-site supervisor shall be provided by the Contractor for the entire duration of
the epoxy injection work. The supervisor shall have had a minimum of 2 years of
documented supervisory experience with the products to be used. If the supervisor does
not have that experience, the supplier or manufacturer of the materials shall provide a
full-time qualified, certified by the manufacturer, field inspector on jobsite during the
entire period of material application. The Installation Contractor shall submit with his bid
to the Consultant a proof of obtaining licenses or permits as required.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The materials supplier shall provide the following test data for each production run or
batch of epoxy formulation to be used:
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 23/2
1. Tensile strength by ASTM D638
2. Elongation at break by ASTM D638
3. Flexural strength of ASTM D790
4. Flexural modulus by ASTM D790
5. Compressive yield strength by ASTM D695
6. Compressive modulus by ASTM D695
7. Heat deflection temperature by ASTM D648
8. Slant shear strength by AASHTO-237
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following to the Consultant:
1. Documentation showing compliance with the Applicator Qualifications as specified
hereinbefore.
2. Technical data sheets published by the material manufacturers for each epoxy
product or formulation to be used showing that his products meet the
requirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include the following:
a. Intended use
b. Pot life (neat)
c. Initial cure time (1000 psi)
d. Tack free (thin film)
e. Final cure (75% ultimate strength)
f. Tensile strengths by ASTM D638-76 (14 days)
g. Tensile elongation by ASTM D638-76 modified (14 days)
h. Flexural strength and modules per ASTM D790-71 at 24 hours, 3 days, and
7 days at 77 degrees F.
i. 24-hr. compressive strength by ASTM C109 modified (1 part epoxy to 3-
1/4 parts aggregate)
3. Submit safety data sheets for each product.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. The product shall be delivered and handled strictly according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any containers of the material to be used which have been opened
previously shall not be accepted.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing and environmental conditions: The Installation Contractor shall examine the
condition of surfaces into which the epoxy is to be injected. He shall follow the
recommendations of the manufacturer with regard to limitations of the materials in
various moisture and temperature levels.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 23/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The epoxy injection materials shall be a two-component, 100% solids, low viscosity, high
strength epoxy resin adhesive.
One of the following approved products shall be used:
1. “Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV or LPL” as manufactured by the Sika Corporation
(www.sikausa.com)
2. “MasterInjet 1500” as manufactured by BASF (www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
3. “Eucopoxy Injection Resin” as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company
(www.euclidchemical.com)
0r approved equal.
B. One of the following approved products shall be used to seal injection ports and cracks for
injection grouting:
1. “Sikadur Injection Gel” as manufactured by the Sika Corporation.
2. “MasterEmaco ADH 327RS” as manufactured by BASF.
3. “Euco #452 or #620 Gel” as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
or approved equal.
C. Aggregate:
1. Aggregate shall be clean, dry, graded, and bagged
2. Well-rounded or spherical-shaped sand is recommended for flowability
3. Aggregate may be graded as follows by volume:
2 parts, 12 mesh to 1 part, 80 mesh, or
3 parts, 16 mesh to 1 part, 90 mesh
4. If the above sand is not used, 30-mesh silica sand shall be used.
2.02 MIXES
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 23/4
A. Where approved by the Consultant, the Contractor may use a pre-placed aggregate
technique. The ratio of binder to aggregate by volume shall be 0.8 or greater. Test data
shall be submitted for conformance with the following:
1. Compressive strength by ASTM D695-76-8000 psi minimum
2. Compressive modulus by ASTM D695-76-2.75 x 106 minimum
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. The equipment used to inject the epoxy shall meet all of the following performance
requirements:
1. Automatic proportioning of materials within the mix ratio tolerances set by the
manufacturer of the epoxy material.
2. Mix the epoxy automatically and completely in line (batch mixing will not be
permitted).
3. Inject the material under pressures recommended by the materials supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION, INJECTION, AND DELIVERY SYSTEM
A. The epoxy shall be injected into the cracks or joints only from the lower elevations of the
members. The bottom, side, and top surfaces of cracked members must be sealed with a
gel-consistency epoxy prior to injection, and must contain appropriate injection ports.
B. The Contractor shall notify the Consultant of the start of the first injected cracks. In the
event that unsound concrete is located in a zone along a crack, and this prevents the
complete injection of the cracks, then the unsound concrete shall be removed prior to
injection.
C. The epoxy material injected into the cracks or joints shall be highly suited for this usage.
The pressure injection system shall be capable of filling cracks as small as 0.002 inches in
width.
D. Where cracks to be injected have any existing sealant, waterproofing materials, or other
debris in the cracks, these cracks shall be cleaned using low-pressure hot water or high-
pressure water jet, as appropriate.
E. The Contractor shall clean surfaces of excess epoxy by grinding or other appropriate means
so that only the edge thickness of completed epoxy-injected cracks is noticeable. Injection
ports shall not extend beyond the plane of the surfaces of the existing concrete.
3.02 PREPACKING LARGE CRACKS
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE EPOXY INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 23/5
A. Where required in cracks of large thickness, the Contractor shall prepack the cracks with
fine aggregates to minimize the effects of exotherm, or reduce tensile stresses caused by
volume reduction during cooling of the injected epoxy.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall supply samples of the injection epoxy, non-sag epoxy, and epoxy
mortar to the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of performing compression tests.
B. A minimum of three samples per day of each epoxy formulation or use shall be made.
C. Samples shall be made by placing epoxy into 3/8-in. inside diameter test tubes. The height
of the sample shall be approximately 1 in. so that after trimming a cylinder of 3/8 in.
diameter and 3/4" length can be obtained.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling and removing two 1-in. diameter by 2-in.
long cores into the side of injected members at the direction of the Consultant to
determine whether the crack injection is complete. The contractor also shall provide
samples of mixed epoxy for testing. If injection is incomplete (less than 90% of the injected
crack filled), reinjection and additional cores may be required at the direction of the
Consultant at no extra cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE CHEMICAL GROUT INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 33/1
SECTION 03 64 33
PRESSURE CHEMICAL GROUT INJECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A.The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, equipment, and labor required to
seal all leaking cracks or joints at locations shown on plans or as designated by the
Engineer.
1.03 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.The Contractor shall have a minimum of three years of experience performing work
similar to that shown in the drawings and specifications.
B.The Contractor shall submit a list of five projects in which similar work to that specified
was successfully completed. The list shall contain the following for each of the five
projects:
1.Project Name
2.Owner of Project
3.Owner's Representative, Address and Telephone Number
4.Brief Description of Work
5.Cost of Portion of Work Similar to that Specified in this Section
6.Total Restoration Cost of Project
7.Date of Completion of Work
D.A full-time on-site supervisor shall be provided by the Contractor for the entire duration of
the chemical grouting work. The supervisor shall have had a minimum of 2 years of
documented supervisory experience with the products to be used. If the supervisor does
not have that experience, the supplier or manufacturer of the materials shall provide a
full-time qualified, certified by the manufacturer, field inspector on jobsite during the
entire period of material application. The Installation Contractor shall submit with his bid
to the Engineer a proof of obtaining licenses or permits as required.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer:
1.Documentation showing compliance with the Applicator Qualifications as
specified herein before.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE CHEMICAL GROUT INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 33/2
2. Technical data sheets published by the material manufacturers for each chemical
grout product or formulation to be used showing that his products meet the
requirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include the following:
a. Intended use
b. Pot life (neat)
c. Initial cure time (1000 psi)
d. Tack free (thin film)
e. Final cure (75% ultimate strength)
3. Submit safety data sheets for each product.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. The product shall be delivered and handled strictly according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any containers of the material to be used which have been opened
previously shall not be accepted.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing and environmental conditions: The Installation Contractor shall examine the
condition of surfaces into which the chemical grout is to be injected. He shall follow the
recommendations of the manufacturer with regard to limitations of the materials in
various moisture and temperature levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. "Mountain Grout” (polyurethane product dependent on project details) as manufactured
by Green Mountain International LLC, 235 Pigeon Street, Waynesville, NC
(www.polyurethanegrouts.com).
B. "Scotch-Seal Chemical Grout 5600" as manufactured by Avanti, Webster, Texas
(www.avantigrout.com).
C. "Hydroactive Grouts" as manufactured by DeNeef America, Inc., 5610 Brystone Drive,
Houston, Texas (www.deneef.com).
D. Products to be used shall be one-component polyurethane and have low viscosity (180cps
maximum at 570F.) for a hairline crack application, and regular viscosity (600 SPX
maximum at 570F.) for a wide crack application as required by the Engineer.
E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to develop the correct mix proportions to achieve
full depth injection of the cracks. The mix proportions shall be approved by the Engineer.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE CHEMICAL GROUT INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 33/3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. The Installation Contractor shall thoroughly review the entire surface around the cracks or
joints to be chemical grout injected to determine the applicability of grout materials in
respect to the thickness of cracks/joints, existence of any foreign materials harmful to the
application of the chemical grout used and deterioration of concrete surface which shall
be repaired and cleaned prior to the application.
B. If the Installation Contractor finds any cracks/joints being too wide to receive an
application of the grout material to be used, he shall submit to the Engineer a complete
written report regarding the locations, existing minimum and maximum thickness and
length of the cracks/joints. The Engineer shall verify the non-applicability of the material
to be used in the cracks/joints reported with the material manufacturer or supplier and
direct the contractor with a proper repair method of wide cracks prior to application of
the grout material.
C. Where any detrimental foreign materials exists, the Contractor shall follow the
recommendations of the chemical grout material manufacturer (subject to the Engineer's
approval) in respect to the materials and methods of cleaning or removing the foreign
materials.
D. "Packers" shall be inserted into pre-drilled holes at strategic locations on surfaces. The
Installation Contractor shall drill holes strictly according to the recommendations by the
material manufacturer or supplier in respect to the locations, sizes and angle of the holes
to be drilled.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Chemical grout shall be pumped and pressure injected into the packers which have been
inserted into pre-drilled holes. Packers compatible with the grout material to be used shall
be installed.
B. The applicator shall allow the grout material with sufficient time to flow into all of the
cracks/joints on its own.
C. The Contractor shall clean surfaces of excess chemical grout used by proper means
recommended by the material manufacturer and/or supplier so that only the edge
thickness of completed grouted cracks is noticeable. Packers shall not extend beyond the
plane of the surface of the existing concrete.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing test injections at a minimum of three
selected locations to finalize material selections, injection procedures and testing
procedures prior to the start of work. The contractor shall extract two full depth cores for
every 500 lineal foot of injection of cracks to demonstrate that the cracks are fully filled
with chemical grout. If injection is incomplete (less than 90% of the injected crack filled),
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESSURE CHEMICAL GROUT INJECTION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 03 64 33/4
re-injection and additional cores may be required at the direction of the Engineer at no
extra cost to the Owner.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A warranty shall be submitted to the Engineer which guarantees that in the event of any
water leak through the repaired cracks/joints, the material manufacturer/supplier and the
Installation Contractor will jointly repair the cracks/joints which have failed any time
during the warranty period of five (5) years with no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 04
MASONRY
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/1
SECTION 04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The extent of work included in this Section is shown on the Drawings and is specified as
follows:
1. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the
furnishing and installation of concrete masonry units as well as built-in metal
doorframes.
2. Coordination and placement of built-in loose steel lintels.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data for concrete masonry units required,
including certified copies of laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show
compliance with the specified requirements.
1. For fire rated masonry units, include data showing compliance with acceptable
authorities.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of masonry unit specified. Select units to show the
range of color and texture which can be expected in the finished work.
D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/2
1. Masonry units: For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and
calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. Include
compliance with fire resistance ratings.
2. Reinforcing bars.
3. Joint reinforcement.
4. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of governing authorities and codes for the
types of masonry construction shown.
1. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Fire Resistance: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction, provide materials and construction which is identical to assemblies whose fire-
resistance rating has been tested in compliance with ASTM E119 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single
source from single manufacturer for each product required.
D. Coordination: Review installation procedures and coordinate with work that must be
integrated with masonry.
E. Construction Tolerances: Lay-up all wall and partitions plumb and true with courses level and
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of
more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet-0 inches in any direction are unacceptable.
F. Job Mock-up: prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panel mock-up using
materials, bond and joint tooling shown or specified for final work. Build mock-up at the site,
where directed, of full thickness and approximately 4 feet x 3 feet, unless otherwise shown,
indicating the proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the
completed work. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start
of masonry work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed
masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed.
G. Provide adequate bracing of walls during erection to prevent damage due to high winds or
other lateral loads until permanent bracing is installed. Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for damage due to failure to take such precautions.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/3
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of
dirt and oil.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Masonry Protections:
1. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow
or ground water and from soilage or intermixture with earth or other materials.
2. In exposed work, do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or
other defects, which might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
3. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by
covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane.
4. Protect masonry from freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40
degrees F. and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed
portions of masonry work. Comply with governing codes and NCMA TEK 16
recommendations for cold weather concrete masonry construction.
5. Frozen Materials: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with
ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven
days after completing cleaning.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units
to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use
units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by
equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Units: Hollow load-bearing, ASTM C90. Aggregate shall conform with ASTM C33.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3000 psi, ASTM C 90.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight, 125 PCF.
3. Size: Manufacturer’s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long x 8
inches high. Provide thicknesses indicated on the drawings.
4. Special Shapes: Provide special shaped units for lintels, corners, jambs, headers, control
joints and other conditions. Never expose cores.
5. Color/Finish: Provide manufacturers standard units suitable for field applied paint finish
unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.3 MORTAR & GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, non-staining, without air entrainment and of natural
color or white to produce the required color of mortar or grout.
1. Use Type III high-early-strength as required for laying masonry in cold weather.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials, which would impair strength or bond.
F. Mortar Mix:
1. Type S for reinforced and load bearing masonry; ASTM C270
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/5
2. Type N for masonry above grade and interior work.
3. Type M for masonry below grade and in contact with earth.
G. Grout for Masonry Fill: Portland cement, sand, gravel and water, proportioned as required to
provide a 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT, TIES & ANCHORS
A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Provide galvanized ladder or truss type reinforcement with a
single pair of side rods for single wythe masonry equal to Durowal "Standard" types unless
otherwise noted.
1. Wire: 9 (nine) gauge side and cross rods hot-dip galvanized in conformance with ASTM
A153, Class B2, 1.5 oz. per sq. ft.
2. Corners and Intersections: Provide prefabricated corners and tees.
3. Width: Provide one side rod for each concrete masonry shell face. Provide width as
recommended by manufacturer for wall width and which gives at least 5/8" minimum
cover on exterior walls.
C. Reinforcing Steel: Provide deformed rebars complying with ASTM A615, Grade 60.
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-
inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars
indicated.
E. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to
move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.5 ISOLATION CONTROL GASKETS
A. Gaskets: Closed cell neoprene conforming to ASTM C509 equal to "Everlastic Neoprene" Type
NN as manufactured by William Products, Inc.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/6
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls Type N.
4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type N.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that
will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout
spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 4000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which unit masonry work is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness shown or specified.
B. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full-size units
without cutting wherever possible.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. General:
1. Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours have
elapsed since initial mixing. Re-temper mortar during the 2-1/2 hour period only as
required to restore workability.
2. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/7
Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at
other locations.
3. Lay-up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerances, with courses level,
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
4. Pattern Bond: Lay concrete masonry units in running bond with vertical joint in each
course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings.
B. Mortar Bedding and Jointing:
1. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical
face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on floor slabs and where adjacent to
cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout.
2. Joint Width: Lay masonry with 3/8-inch wide joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
4. Tool exposed joints slightly concave unless otherwise shown. Compress mortar to form
a dense, smooth, water-tight surface.
5. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2-block length in each course; do not tooth. Clean
exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying
fresh masonry.
D. Grouting: Grout cells of masonry units where shown and at all masonry lintels, bond beams,
jambs and bearing points. Fully grout concrete masonry for three full courses below bearing
points. Fully grout metal frames built into masonry work. Fully grout cells of masonry units,
which contain vertical reinforcing bars.
1. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
3. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
4. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
5. Pour grout using container with spout and consolidate immediately by rodding or
puddling; do not use trowels. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of
grout for more than one hour. Terminate pour 1-1/2 inches below top of highest course
in pour.
E. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion, and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in
related items as the masonry work progresses. Rake out mortar in preparation for application
of caulking and sealants. See "Joint Sealants" section.
1. If expansion joints are not shown, provide joints 30 feet o.c. throughout the work.
2. For non-load bearing work allow for deflection between top of walls and structure
above. Maintain lateral stability with concealed clip angles attached to structure above
in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Provide compressible fillers and joint sealers to
maintain acoustical performance of wall assembly.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/8
3.5 REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A.Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and
specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum
cover of 5/8 inch on side of walls. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at ends of units.
1.Reinforce all single wythe or multi-wythe walls with continuous horizontal joint
reinforcing not more than 16 inches on center vertically unless otherwise shown.
2.Space reinforcing at 8 inches o.c. above and below openings and extend reinforcing at
least 2 feet beyond each jamb.
B.Reinforced Concrete Masonry: Reinforce concrete masonry units where shown on the drawing
with #5 rebars at 8 inches o.c. unless otherwise noted. Provide horizontal joint reinforcing as
stated above.
3.6 LINTEL INSTALLATION
A.Metal Lintels: Install loose metal lintels where shown on the Drawings.
B.Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry lintels where indicated and wherever openings are shown
without another type of lintel. Provide precast, preformed or built-in-place lintels which are
adequate for loading conditions encountered. Provide at least 8 inches of bearing at each end.
Obtain Engineer's approval of all masonry lintels used.
3.7 TOLERANCES
A.Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or
minus 1/4 inch.
2.For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch.
3.For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B.Lines and Levels:
1.For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2.For conspicuous horizontal lines do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
3.For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4.For conspicuous vertical lines do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
5.For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
6.For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
Bridger Garage Repairs UNIT MASONRY
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 04 20 00/9
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by
more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch.
3.8 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner.
4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 04 20 00
DIVISION 5
METALS
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 1
SECTION 05 05 19
POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.The extent of work included in this Section is shown on the Contract Drawings and is specified
as follows:
1.Furnish all work, labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to provide and
install post-installed (drilled-in) anchors in previously placed concrete and/or in concrete
masonry unit (CMU) construction as indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified
herein, or as otherwise required to anchor or support materials and equipment from
structure.
2.This Section includes requirements for the following types of anchors:
a.Mechanical Anchors
1)Expansion Anchors (self-expanding, drop-in or drilled-in)
2)Screw Anchors
b.Adhesive Anchors (bonded via grouts, epoxies, polymers or hybrids)
3.For adhesive anchors, include any required protection of anchors with approved fire-
resistive materials, or spray-on fireproofing to meet Code requirements when anchors
are attached to fire-resistive construction.
B.Work Not Included:
1.Anchors, embeds, and other materials placed prior to concrete pour and cast into
concrete – See Section 03 30 00.
2.Concrete reinforcing steel - See Section 03 20 00.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.General
1.Space anchors as required to support the construction or equipment being anchored
without sagging or deformation.
2.Unless otherwise noted on the Contract drawings, the spacing requirements indicated in
the applicable ICC ES report shall be used.
3.Completed anchor installation shall not compromise the design fire-resistance of a
substrate.
B.Structural Performance
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 2
1. If a specific type of anchor is not indicated on the Contract Drawings or otherwise by the
Architect, select type appropriate to conditions and item being fastened.
2. If required loading capacity is not indicated on the Contract drawings, determine
required loading capacity in accordance with accepted engineering principles and as
required by applicable Code.
3. Use recommended and appropriate safety factors and load reduction factors.
4. Confirm application requirements for cracked and uncracked concrete substrates.
C. Noted Restrictions
1. Post-installed anchors may only be installed in sound concrete. Surfaces showing
obvious distress by way of porosity, disintegration, carbonation, and cracks over 0.02-
inch in width and 12-inches or longer and within the distance of the embedment length
shall be reported to the Architect for evaluation.
2. Post-installed anchors shall not be used with lightweight concrete unless specifically
tested per ICC-ES AC193, ICC-ES AC308, or ACI 355.2
3. Adhesive Anchors
a. Adhesive anchors shall not be used in overhead applications or connections
where anchors must be capable of resisting sustained tension.
b. Adhesive anchors shall not be used where they will be exposed to sustained
temperatures above 110-degrees Fahrenheit or short-term temperatures above
180-degrees Fahrenheit unless tested per ICC-ES AC308 for higher temperature.
c. Adhesive anchors shall not be installed if substrate temperature is below 40-
degrees Fahrenheit unless tested per ICC-ES AC308 for lower installation
temperature.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a. Structural design criteria.
b. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
c. Installation methods.
d. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
B. Code Compliance Report by ICC Evaluation Service or other agency recognized by the authority
having jurisdiction. Code Compliance Reports shall be submitted for anchors that will be
considered for use on this project.
1. Anchors specifically referenced by the plans or specifications shall have the Evaluation
Service Reports provided with a cover letter indicating the applicable notes and/or
details for each anchor (unless noted otherwise). Report to the Architect if the anchors
referenced on the Drawings have not been adequately tested or whose evaluation
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 3
reports do not exist. Proposed alternative anchors will then be considered in lieu of
those referenced.
2. Anchors not specifically referenced by the plans or specifications shall have the
Evaluation Service Reports submitted with the associated justification.
C. Samples
1. Representative length and diameters of each type anchor shown on the Contract
Drawings.
2. Submit three (3) samples of all materials.
D. Quality Control Submittals
1. Design Calculations
a. Design Calculations are generally not required to be submitted unless noted
otherwise.
b. Calculations are required to be submitted:
1) Where design loads are shown on structural documents in lieu of
completely detailed anchor information.
2) Upon request, when determined by the Architect that the submitted
information is insufficient to complete review.
c. Calculations are not required to be submitted:
1) Where anchor size, length or embed length, spacing, and a proprietary
trade name are specifically shown on the Structural Drawings.
2) For anchors used by other trades but are not shown on the Structural
Drawings, including but not limited to hangers for piping, mechanical
equipment, electrical raceways, etc., the equipment supplier remains
responsible for the proper anchor design.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Anchors included in this Section, but not shown in specific detail on the Contract drawings,
may be considered a substitution anchor for that detail. The structural capacity of the
substitute anchor or anchor group must be no less than the capacity of the original anchor or
group of anchors or adequate to carry the design load when shown on the plans.
B. Other post-installed anchors will be considered in lieu of specified anchors provided they meet
the requirements of this Specification. Submittals must be approved in writing by the
Architect prior to anchor installation.
C. The Architect may reject proposed substitutions for aesthetics, interference, inappropriate
materials, fire ratings, or any other reason.
D. The contractor proposing substitutions shall be responsible for all additional costs incurred
related to that substitution, including those of other trades and design professionals. The
contractor proposing substitutions shall be responsible for coordination with all other trades.
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 4
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable Specifications: Latest edition of following specifications and recommended
practices shall become part of this specification as if written herein. Wherever requirements
conflict, the more stringent shall govern.
{ACI 318-14 Chapter 17.
1. Mechanical Anchors
a. ACI 355.2, "Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete".
b. Special Code Requirements
1) Expansion and Screw Anchors (Concrete): ICC-ES AC193.
2) Expansion Anchors (Masonry): ICC-ES AC01.
3) Screw Anchors (Masonry): ICC-ES AC106.
2. Adhesive Anchor
a. ACI 355.4, “Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete”.
b. Special Code Requirements
1) Adhesive Anchors (Concrete): ICC-ES AC308.
2) Adhesive Anchors (Masonry): ICC-ES AC58.
3. Manufacturer's published specifications and installation requirements.
B. No post-installed concrete anchors shall be permitted without anchor manufacturer having
obtained ICC-ES Evaluation Report for a specific anchor indicating its approval for use in
cracked concrete.
C. Where material or equipment must be supported from the structure, the installer of that
material or equipment support shall be responsible for supplying the anchors and meeting the
requirements of this specification unless specifically noted otherwise on the plans.
D. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: When the Architect is requested to review a Substitution, a field-
constructed mock-up may be requested. Upon request, build mock-ups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final work:
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by the Architect.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents unless such deviations are specifically approved by the Architect in writing.
3. Approved mockups may not remain as part of the Work.
E. Inspection:
1. The Owner will engage, at his/her expense, an independent Testing Agency to observe
anchor installation per the requirements of this Section and as outlined in Section 01 45
00 of these specifications under “Drilled-In Inserts”.
2. The Owner’s Testing Agency will provide the following tests and inspections:
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 5
a. All anchors shall be visually inspected in order to verify and document that they
have been installed as specified herein. As a minimum, inspection attributes for
post-installed anchors shall comply with the special inspection section of the
applicable ICC-ES Evaluation Report (with the exception of validating the strength
of existing concrete) plus additional attributes imposed by this Section.
b. Continuous special inspection during installation to verify materials delivered to
site comply with contract documents, bolt type and dimensions, concrete type
and compressive strength, pre-drilled hole dimensions and cleaning (where
required by manufacturer’s printed instructions and/or ICC-ES Evaluation Report),
embedment, spacing, edge distances, slab thickness, tightening torque, and any
other items requiring inspection by product's current published ICC-ES Evaluation
Report.
3. If visual inspection reveals that the installed anchor does not meet the specified
requirements, the anchor shall be removed, replaced, or relocated with the written
approval of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide post-installed
anchors as manufactured and assembled by HILTI or an approved equivalent. Single source
manufacturer is required unless approved by the Architect in writing.
B. Products: The following manufacturers offer products that comply with the requirements of
this section:
1. Hilti (www.us.hilti.com)
2. ITW Red Head ( www.itwredhead.com)
3. Powers Fasteners (www.powers.com)
4. Simpson Strong-Tie (www.strongtie.com)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Interior Use (unless noted otherwise): Provide carbon steel anchors with zinc plating in
accordance with ASTM B633 (Class SC1, Type I) for use in conditioned environments free from
potential moisture. For interior uses where anchor is in contact with preservative treated
wood anchors must be mechanically galvanized, hot dip galvanized or 300 series stainless
steel.
B. Exposed Use (unless noted otherwise): Provide hot dip galvanized anchors with hot dip
galvanized nuts and washers or stainless steel anchors using Series 300 stainless steel bolts
with Series 304/316 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers unless noted otherwise for
the following conditions:
1. Exterior environments.
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 6
2. Potentially moist environments including exterior wall construction.
3. Corrosive environments including parking areas.
4. All exterior wall cladding support and anchorage.
5. Where anchor is in contact with preservative treated wood.
6. As noted on the Drawings.
2.3 PRODUCTS
A. Expansion Anchors
1. Concrete Wedge Anchors (expansion bolt)
a. Carbon steel anchors (where noted): ASTM B633, Class SC1, Type I or III.
b. Stainless steel anchors (where noted): ASTM F593, Type 303, 304 or 316.
c. Tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in
accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC-ES AC193 for all mandatory tests.
2. Masonry Wedge Anchors (expansion bolt)
a. Federal Specification A-A-1923A, Type 4.
b. Mechanically galvanized (where noted): ASTM B695, Class 55, Type 1.
c. Stainless steel anchors (where noted): ASTM F593, Type 303, 304 or 316.
d. Tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC01 for all mandatory tests.
B. Screw Anchors
1. Concrete Screw Anchors
a. Carbon steel heat-treated or hardened.
b. Zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633, Class SC1, Type I or equivalent
coating.
c. Tested and qualified for use per ICC-ES AC193 for all mandatory tests.
2. Masonry Screw Anchors: (Grouted Masonry Only)
a. Carbon steel heat-treated or hardened.
b. Zinc-plated per ASTM B633, Class SC1, Type I, mechanically galvanized per ASTM
B695, or equivalent coating.
c. Tested per ICC-ES AC106 for all mandatory tests (and seismic tests).
C. Adhesive Anchors
1. Adhesive anchors consist of an insert and an adhesive.
2. Inserts
a. Threaded Rod Inserts: Provide preparation or configuration as recommended by
manufacturer.
1) All Exposures (unless noted otherwise): Zinc coated; hot-dipped per ASTM
A123 or ASTM A153 Class C or D, or mechanically deposited per ASTM
B695, Class 65, Type I.
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 7
3. Adhesives for Concrete
a. Epoxy: ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C.
b. Acrylic: Cartridge type, two-component, acrylic based system dispensed and
mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Minimum
physical requirements of ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class A, B and C.
c. Tested and qualified for use in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance
with ICC- ES AC308 for all mandatory and optional seismic tests including creep
tests.
1) Post-installed adhesive anchors shall be tested for installation in water-
saturated concrete per ICC-ES AC308.
2) Post-installed adhesive anchors shall be tested for standing water in holes
per ICC-ES AC308.
4. Adhesives for Solid Concrete Masonry
a. Epoxy: ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C.
b. Acrylic: Cartridge type, two-component, acrylic based system dispensed and
mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Minimum
physical requirements of ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class A, B and C.
c. Tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC58 for all mandatory tests and the following
optional tests:
1) Seismic tests
2) Creep tests
3) Dampness tests
4) Freeze-thaw tests
5. Adhesives for Hollow Concrete Masonry
a. Epoxy: ASTM C881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B and C.
b. Tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC58 for all mandatory tests and the following
optional tests.
1) Seismic tests
2) Creep tests
3) Dampness tests
4) Freeze-thaw tests
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Report all
deviations from the Contract Documents to the Architect in writing.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 8
3.2 ASSESSMENT OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Identify location of embedded items such as reinforcing steel, stressing tendons, conduit,
heating tubes, etc. prior to drilling holes. Coordinate with respective trades if any apparent
conflict exists.
B. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of any required repairs including engineering costs.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as
required by applicable Code including, but not limited to, applicable requirements of ICC-ES
evaluation reports.
1. Use special tools when recommended by manufacturer for installation of anchors unless
otherwise permitted specifically by the Architect.
B. Apply anchor items neatly, with anchor mounted plumb and level unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors shall be installed perpendicular to the concrete surface within a plus or minus 5-
degree tolerance. Post-installation verification of this criterion may be satisfied by visual
inspection to verify proper seating of the nut and washer.
D. In areas where concrete has been removed, the minimum anchor embedment shall be
measured from the surface of sound concrete.
E. Drill holes of proper diameter and depth in accordance with manufacturer’s published design
information for that specific anchor. Use only equipment approved by anchor manufacturer.
All holes shall be perpendicular to the concrete surface unless shown otherwise on structural
plans.
1. Do not drill holes until base material has achieved full design strength.
2. Depth of drilled holes shall be limited where required by the Contract Documents and
any drilling into manufactured components shall be approved by the component
manufacturer.
3. Exercise care in drilling to avoid damaging any existing embedded items. If embedded
items are encountered, stop drilling and contact the Architect immediately. Any offsets
or relocations of anchors must be approved by the Architect.
F. Clean out holes, properly prepare substrate, and install anchors in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Proper tools must be on job site.
G. For adhesive anchors, maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and
ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer. Verify that base material
temperature is within manufacturer limits. Do not install adhesive anchors if any criteria do
not fall within manufacturer’s limits. Ensure that bore holes and anchors are free of dust,
standing water, ice, debris, grease, oil, dirt and other foreign matter.
Bridger Garage Repairs POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY (CMU)
05 05 19 - 9
H. For adhesive anchors, protect anchors with approved fire-resistive materials, or spray-on
fireproofing when anchors are attached to fire-resistive construction. Refer to ICC-ES
Evaluation Service Reports (ESR’s) Conditions of Use for applicability.
I. Bending and welding of post-installed anchors is not permitted.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Architect reserves the right to require the anchor manufacturer's representative to
demonstrate proper installation procedures for post-installed anchors and to observe
Contractor's installation procedures, at no extra cost to Owner.
B. The Architect reserves the right to require pullout or shear tests to determine adequacy of
anchors, at no extra cost to Owner.
3.5 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove and replace misplaced or malfunctioning anchors. Fill empty anchor holes and patch
failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Anchors that fail to
meet installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning.
B. Abandoned holes shall be grouted with non-shrink grout. When post-installed anchors fail to
meet with requirements as determined by inspection and testing, the following repairs may be
undertaken:
1. When failure is due to excessive anchorage pullout, the Contractor shall evaluate the
damage, develop a repair method, and document that method in writing. If approved,
the anchor may be reset once prior to re-drilling the hole and installing an anchor of
equal size. Use the minimum spacing embedment depth, and installation torque
required for the original anchor.
2. When failure is due to breaking of the anchor, slippage or loosening, bending, improper
installation or poor attachment, remove the defective anchor, re-drill the hole, and
install the same diameter anchor if the integrity of surrounding concrete has not been
disturbed.
3. For cases where excessive slippage upon torquing is experienced, or usage of the same
hole is not possible, fill the existing hole with non-shrink grout and relocate the anchor
location.
4. When failure is due to breakout of concrete around the anchor, the Contractor’s
engineer shall evaluate the damage, develop a repair method, and document that
method in writing. Local spalling of the concrete around the anchor, up to a maximum
depth of 1/4-inch, is not considered a concrete breakout failure.
END OF SECTION 05 05 19
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/1
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 specification Sections apply to the work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. All work included under this section is subject to the Contract Documents, all of which form a part of this Section. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all materials, labor and appliances to perform work of this section as indicated on the drawings and or specified herein, including but not limited to the following: 1. Steel columns, beams, bracing, plates, bolts and other structural steel items. 2. Lintels, angles, channels, and other shapes attached to structural steel members. 3. Galvanic coatings on structural steel members. 4. Shop painting and field touch-up painting. 5. Fabrication, erection and all connections to complete installation.
6. Inspection of materials and fabrications.
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Grouting under base and bearing plates - Section 03 30 00.
B. Loose lintels, loose shelf angles, metal stairs, ladders and miscellaneous metal-Section
05 50 00.
C. Finish Painting - Section 09 90 00.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. The following codes and specifications (Latest Edition) shall govern. In cases of conflict on special items, the more stringent of the requirements shall be adhered to. 1. Local and Governmental Building Code. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction. a. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings and Supplements.
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/2
b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
3. Engineering Foundation Research Council.
a. Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
4. American Welding Society.
a. Code for Welding in Building Construction.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Steel Fabricator: 1. Fabricator shall have not less than five (5) years experience in the fabrication of structural steel. 2. Submit a written description of fabrication ability including facilities, personnel and list of similar completed projects. B. Steel Erector: 1. Erector shall have not less than Five (5) years experience in the erection of structural steel. 2. Submit a written description of structural steel erection ability including equipment, personnel and a list of similar completed projects. C. Welders: 1. Welding procedures, welders, welding operations, and tackers shall be qualified
in accordance with AWS Building Code.
2. All welders working on this project will be assigned an identifying symbol or
mark. Each welder will be required to mark or stamp his symbol on each
weldment completed for identification. Contractor shall maintain a record of
welders employed, date of qualification and symbol or identification mark
assigned to each.
D. Testing Agency:
1. Agency shall not have less than Five (5) years experience performing the
structural steel tests and inspection services.
2. Submit a written description illustrating the ability to perform the structural steel tests and inspection services including qualifications of personnel with scope of each qualification test, laboratory and field facilities and a list of similar projects. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/3
1. Submit shop drawings for Engineer’s acceptance. Shop drawings shall include
steel setting diagrams and all details of jointing, construction and engagement
of structural steel with other work. Drawings shall also show location, type, size
and extent of all welds and bolts, and distinguish between field and shop
fastenings.
2. Engineer’s acceptance of shop drawings shall be obtained before starting work
on fabrication or erection of structural steel.
3. Engineer’s acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from
any responsibility either in respect to compliance with the plans and specifications or the proper fitting together of the work. 4. All welds, both shop and field, shall be indicated by AWS "Welding Symbols" A2.0 - latest edition. B. Erection Procedure: 1. Submit data, illustrative and written, to describe the structural steel erection procedure, including the sequence of erection and temporary staying and bracing. Contractor shall provide sufficient bracing, etc. so that the erected steel is stable during construction or until all the concrete slabs are poured. C. Welding and Procedure and Equipment: 1. Submit written description as required to illustrate each welding procedure to be performed in the specified work. 2. Submit descriptive data for field welding equipment, including type, voltage and amperage.
D. Proofs of Compliance for Materials:
1. Submit to the Engineer, certified copies of mill test reports including names and
location of mills and shops and analysis of chemical and physical properties of
steel.
2. Submit to the Engineer, certificates of conformance for shop primer paint.
3. Submit to the Engineer, reports of mechanical properties of headed stud type
shear connections.
4. Submit to the Engineer, reports of mechanical tests for high strength threaded
fasteners. E. Anchor Bolt Drawings: 1. Immediately after this contract is executed, prepare an anchor bolt plan showing in detail the location and elevation of all column bases and masonry bearings for the structural steel members where required.
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/4
2. Anchor bolt plan shall show size and location of all anchor bolts, and shall show
all clearances necessary.
F. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Submit to the Engineer description of each type of welding stud and arc shield.
G. Inspection Reports:
1. Submit to the Engineer, reports for the inspection tests specified in paragraphs
2.04 and 3.02.
1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials to be Installed Under Other Sections: 1. Anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction shall be delivered to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place operations of masonry work. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of the anchor bolts and other devices. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Structural steel members which are stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. 2. Steel shall be protected from corrosion. 3. Other materials shall be stored in a weather tight and dry place, until ready for use in the work.
4. Packaged materials shall be stored in their original unbroken package or
container.
5. Special care shall be taken in storing Low Hydrogen electrodes, so that they are
completely dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Shapes: FY 50 ksi Steel. ASTM A992
B. Channels, Angles, WT and Steel Plates: FY 36 ksi Steel. ASTM A36. C. Structural Tubes: FY 46 ksi Steel. ASTM A500 Grade B . D. Pipes: FY 35 ksi Steel. ASTM A53 Type E or S E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A325 Bolts with A325 Nuts and Washers.
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/5
F. Anchor Bolts & Anchor Bolt Assemblies:
1. Conform to ASTM A1553 FY 36 ksi.
2. Dimensions and shapes as indicated on drawings.
G. Filler Material for Welding:
1. Shielded metal-arc welding AWS A5-5.
2. Welded joints designed using E7016 low hydrogen electrodes.
3. Fabricator or Erector may substitute filler material in accordance with Section 1.17.2 of AISC Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings after obtaining Engineer’s approval. H. Shop Paint Primer: 1. Alkyd Varnish Base Primer to conform to Federal Specification TT-P-86, Type III. I. Galvanic Coating: 1. Galvanic coating of structural steel shapes as indicated to conform to ASTM A123 "Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip Galvanized) on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip". 2. Hot-dip Galvanic coating weight shall not be less than 2.3 oz. per square foot. 3. Galvanized items to be stamped certifying weight of galvanized coating. 4. It is the intent for all items requiring galvanic coating to be galvanized after fabrication. Where this is not possible, special provisions must be made with
the approval of the Engineer.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Structural Steel in accordance with the latest AISC Specification for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, with the modifications and
additional requirements specified in this section.
1. Where a conflict occurs between the standards specified above, the more
stringent of the specific requirements shall govern.
2. All structural steel beams, shall be fabricated so that the high point of the sweep
is set toward the perimeter of the building and natural camber is turned upward. B. Shop Connections: 1. Provide bolted or welded connections as indicated on the drawings. Contractor to provide all design calculations for these connections. C. Field Connections:
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/6
1. Provide bolted connections, except where welded connections are indicated.
2. High strength threaded fasteners shall be used for all bolted connections.
D. High Strength Bolted Construction Assemblies:
1. All high strength bolts shall be tightened by standard impact wrench or turn-of-
the-nut method.
2. Other tightening methods, conforming to specifications for structural steel
joints may be used only with approval of the Engineer. E. Welded Construction: 1. Welding process shall be limited to the shielded-arc method. Other methods may be employed with the approval of the Engineer. F. Bearing Plates: 1. Bearing plates shall be provided under beams and girders resting on footings, piers and walls. 2. Bearing plates shall be either loose or attached. G. Base Plates: 1. Column base plates shall be rolled, pressed and milled as per AISC specification, Sect. 1.21.3 and furnished attached to the column. H. Shop Painting:
1. Shop paint all steel work except:
a. Beam top flange to receive shear connectors.
b. Local areas of columns shear connected to concrete.
c. Local areas to be welded.
d. Local areas around high strength friction-type bolted connections.
e. Galvanized structural steel.
2. All steelwork other than that specifically excluded herein, shall receive the following shop paint system: a. Surface preparation: SSPC SP 7. b. Visual standard of cleanliness: SSPC Vis 1-677, pictorial standards BSa 1, CSa 1, and DSa 1. c. Pretreatment: none required.
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/7
d. Paint Application: SSPC PA-164.
e. Paint: SSPC Paint 14-64T-Federal Spec. TT-P-86c Type II.
f. Number of Prime Coats: Two
g. Dry Film Thickness: not less than 1.7 mils, for first coat and 1.3 mils for
second coat.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All certificates and reports as specified in 1.05 D shall be submitted to the Engineer. A Testing Agency shall be employed by this contract for the tests specified in sub-paragraph B below, and for such other tests as required to fulfill this contract. B. Testing Agency shall perform the following: 1. Determine mechanical properties, in accordance with ASTM A370, of the following materials: a. Anchor bolts. b. Filler metals for welding. 2. Inspection of shop welds shall be in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Building Code and as follows: a. Visual inspection of all shop welds in accordance with Article 605. b. Magnetic particle inspection of shop welds in accordance with ASTM E109. Test all fillet welds for 10% of length, with a minimum of 1'-0" length tested.
c. Radiographic inspection of shop welds in accordance with AWS D1.0
Appendix B and extent of testing as herein specified. Test all groove
welds for 10% of length with a minimum of 1'-0" tested.
d. Ultrasonic testing shall be acceptable in lieu of Radiographic inspection.
3. Inspection of Shop Painting:
a. Surface preparation prior to painting shall be visually evaluated for
degree of cleaning by comparison with SSPC pictorial standards.
4. Cost of all testing specified in this Section shall be at Contractor's expense PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with the latest AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, and the New York State
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/8
Building Code, latest edition, with modifications and additional requirements of this
Section.
1. Where a conflict occurs between the standards specified, the more stringent of
the specific requirements shall govern.
B. Column Bases and Bearing Plates:
1. Attached column bases and bearing plates for beams and similar structural
members shall be aligned with wedges or shims.
2. Bearing plates which are too heavy to be placed without a derrick or crane shall be set and wedged or shimmed. C. Erection Tolerances: 1. Individual pieces shall be erected so that deviation from plumb, level and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500. D. Field Assembly: 1. Structural steel frames shall be accurately assembled to the lines and elevation indicated, within the specified erection tolerances. 2. The various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure after being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. 3. Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. 4. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled.
5. Splices shall be permitted only where indicated.
6. Field connections, including high strength bolted construction, welded
construction and shear connectors shall be as specified under "Fabrication."
7. Erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and
left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds.
E. Gas Cutting:
1. Field correcting of fabrication by gas cutting shall not be permitted on any
member in the structural frame without prior approval of the Engineer. F. Galvanized Structural Members: 1. Use erection procedures as specified under AISC Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 2. Handle galvanized members to assure that the galvanized coating is not in any way damaged.
Bridger Garage Repairs STRUCTURAL STEEL
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 12 00/9
3. When galvanic coatings are damaged due to welding, touch up coating with
zinc-rich paint.
G. Field Touch-Up Painting:
1. After the erection of structural steel, paint field bolt heads and nuts, field welds
and abrasions in the shop paint coating, with the same paint used for the shop
painting.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency shall perform the following: 1. Inspection of erected structural steel work for conformance with the requirements specified. 2. Inspection of field welds shall be in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Building Code and as follows: a. Visual inspection of all field welds in accordance with Article 605. b. Magnetic particle inspection of field welds in accordance with ASTM E109. Test all fillet welds for 10% of length, with a minimum of 1'-0" length tested. c. Radiographic inspection of field welds in accordance with AWS D 1.0-69 Appendix B and extent of testing as herein specified. Test all groove welds for 10% of length with a minimum of 1'-0" length tested. END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 1
SECTION 05 15 15
HOT DIP GALVANIZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Hot dip galvanizing iron and steel items as shown on the Drawings and/or as
required in other Division 5 Sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Dip Galvanizing: A shop-applied zinc coating applied by means of dipping metal
items into molten zinc for the purposes of long-term corrosion protection.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Manufacturer’s Specifications and Application Instructions: Submit
manufacturer's specifications for coating system including description of
materials. Include cautions and limitations, if any, for proper use of proposed
finishes plus recommendations for handling.
2. Submit manufacturer’s product data and applications instructions for touch-up
paint.
B. Quality Control Submittals
1. Certifications: Provide certifications indicating compliance with the Quality
Assurance article below.
2. Submit Galvanizer's Certificate of Compliance with each lot that the hot dip
galvanized coating on that lot meets or exceeds the specified requirements of
ASTM A 123 or A 153 (as applicable).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards
1. Comply with requirements of the following standards, latest edition, except as
herein modified:
a. American Galvanizers Association (AGA):
1) Quality Assurance Manual (latest edition).
2) Inspection of Hot Dip Galvanized Products (2011).
3) The Design of Products to be Hot Dip Galvanized after
Fabrication (2012).
4) Recommended Details of Galvanizing Structures (2012).
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 2
b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1) A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
2) A 143 Practice for Safeguarding against Embrittlement of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for
Detecting Embrittlement.
3) A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
4) A 384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion
During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.
5) A 385 Specification for Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc
Coatings (Hot-Dip).
6) A 780 Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
7) B 6 Specification for Zinc.
8) E 376 Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-
Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods.
c. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(NAAMM):
1) Metal Finishes Manual (2006).
2. In case of discrepancy, the most stringent requirements will govern as
determined by the Architect.
B. Qualifications
1. Galvanizer
a. A firm specializing in hot dip galvanizing after fabrication and with not
less than five (5) years of successful experience in hot dip galvanizing.
b. Member of AGA.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle all items to be galvanized in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage
and to minimize distortion.
B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturers’ instructions and
recommendations.
1. Load and store galvanized items in a manner that prevents formation of wet
storage film.
2. Stack or bundle galvanized items to allow air between galvanized surfaces.
3. Do not store galvanized items directly on building or ground surface.
1.06 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination between Contractor, Fabricator and Galvanizer
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 3
1. The Contractor shall consult with the Fabricator and Galvanizer regarding
potential problems or potential handling problems during the galvanizing
process which may require modification of design before fabrication proceeds.
Contractor to notify the Architect in a timely manner of any propose design
modifications.
2. Prior to fabrication, Contractor shall submit approved fabrication shop drawings
to the Galvanizer. The Galvanizer shall review fabricator's shop drawings for
suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and coordinate any required
fabrication modifications.
3. Determination of Special Processing: For steel to be hot-dip galvanized, provide
steel chemically suitable for metal coatings complying with the following
requirements: carbon below 0.25%, phosphorous below 0.04%, manganese
below 1.3%, and silicon below 0.04%. Notify the Galvanizer if steel does not
meet these requirements so that suitability for galvanizing may be determined
and whether special processing techniques are required.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Pre-construction Conference
1. Topics to be addressed include project schedule, scope of metal fabrications,
coordination between fabricator and galvanizer, finish of surfaces, application of
coatings, submittals and approvals.
2. See Section 01 45 00 for additional information.
1.08 GALVANIZER’S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Inspection and testing of hot dip galvanized coatings shall be done per the guidelines of
Inspection of Hot Dip Galvanized Products by AGA.
1. Include visual examination and tests in accordance with ASTM A 123 or A 153 as
applicable to determine acceptable adhesion and thickness of the zinc coating
on the metal surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Base material for galvanizing shall be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as described
in ASTM A 384 and A 385. Steel materials suitable for galvanizing include structural
shapes, pipe, sheet, fabrications and assemblies.
B. Base materials shall be chemically suitable for galvanizing.
C. Zinc for galvanizing shall conform to ASTM B6, Prime Western grade.
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 4
2.02 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabrication practices for products to be in accordance with the applicable portions of
ASTM A 143, A 384, and A 385, except as specified herein. Avoid fabrication techniques
which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel.
1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with Class II guidelines as described in
Recommended Details of Galvanizing Structures by AGA.
B. Remove all welding slag, splatter, anti-splatter compounds and burrs prior to delivery
for galvanizing. When welding material to be galvanized, avoid the use of a high silicon
welding rod.
C. Provide holes and/or lifting lugs at positions acceptable to the Architect in order to
facilitate handling during the galvanizing process. Close holes after galvanizing where
holes allow entry of water in completed work.
D. Avoid unsuitable marking paints. Use only water-soluble markers. Consult with the
galvanizer about removal of grease, oil paint and other deleterious material prior to
fabrication.
E. Remove by blast cleaning or other methods surface contaminants and coatings which
would not be removable by the normal chemical cleaning process in the galvanizing
operation.
F. Whenever possible, slip joints should be used to minimize field welding of materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Inspect substrates to which coating work of this section is applied for
conditions which may impair or be detrimental to the performance of the system. No
coating work shall be installed until corrections to substrates have been performed.
B. Metal Preparation: Pre-clean steel work in accordance with accepted methods to
produce an acceptable surface for quality hot dip galvanizing.
3.02 GALVANIZING
A. Hot Dip Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication by the
hot dip process in accordance with ASTM A 123.
B. Hot Dip Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware components in
accordance with ASTM A 153.
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 5
C. Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A 143.
D. Handle all articles to be galvanized in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage
and to minimize distortion.
E. To minimize surface imperfections use of the galvanizing process involving a flux blanket
on the kettle (wet method) is prohibited.
F. Coat any steel item less than 44 feet in length and 8 feet in depth in a single dip to
minimize potential distortion.
G. Tumble small parts during galvanizing to prevent build-up of galvanized coating.
H. Coating Requirements
1. Coating Weight: Conform with the minimum shown in paragraph 5.1 of ASTM A
123 or Table 1 of ASTM A 153, as appropriate.
2. Surface Finish: Continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as
possible and free from any defect detrimental to the stated end use of the
coated article.
3. Adhesion: Withstand normal handling consistent with the nature and thickness
of the coating and normal use of the article.
I. Post-Galvanizing Treatments
1. For architecturally exposed galvanized surfaces, provide passivation treatments
as required to prevent wet storage staining.
3.03 REPAIRS
A. Galvanized Coatings
1. Touch-up damaged and abraded galvanized surfaces in strict compliance with
ASTM A780. Prepare surfaces in compliance with SSPC AP-10 near white metal.
2. Shop Repair: The maximum area to be repaired is defined in accordance with
ASTM A 123 Section 6.2 “Finish”.
3. Field Repair: For field touch up of hot-dip galvanized components and field
coating of welded areas requiring corrosion protection, repair using zinc rich
coating or “cold galvanizing” compound. Provide factory mixed and prepared
organic binder, zinc-rich paint specifically formulated for use on steel surfaces
and for repair of hot dip galvanized steel. Minimum 95% by weight of dry film
of “ultra-pure” zinc dust per ASTM D520 Type III. Provide a minimum dry film
thickness of 8 mils.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect galvanized items from all possible damage. Protection shall be as recommended
by manufacturer.
Bridger Garage Repairs HOT DIP GALVANIZATION
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 15 15 - 6
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs METAL DECKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 31 00 - 1
SECTION 05 31 00
METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of metal deck work is shown on the drawings and is hereby defined to
include closure strips and miscellaneous accessories required for a complete system.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and
Roof Decks."
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data or other published information indicating total weight of product
to be provided for the Project, percent of post-consumer recycled material by weight
and percent of post-industrial recycled material by weight. Include material costs
(excluding costs of installation).
B. Submit product data or other published information verifying the location of
manufacturing facility including name, address, and distance between manufacturing
facility and the project site. Provide manufacturer’s documentation indicating location
where the base materials were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested, etc. and the
distance between this location and the project site. Also include material costs
(excluding costs of installation).
C. Submit product data or other published information verifying the VOC (Volatile Organic
Compound) content is less than or equal to the allowable VOC content established by
the governing standard.
D. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
each type of decking and accessories.
1. Provide test data for mechanical fasteners used for fastening deck to supporting
structures.
Bridger Garage Repairs METAL DECKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 31 00 - 2
E. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and
conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut
openings, special jointing, and other accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to
the following:
1. Western Metal Deck
2. United Steel Deck, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36; A992 for W shapes.
B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 606-4, to match steel deck.
C. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic
rubber.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, unless
otherwise shown; with flush, telescoped, or nested 2 inch laps at ends and interlocking
or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as shown.
B. Roof Decks: Comply with the depth and gage requirements, physical cross-sectional
properties of the deck and design criteria shown on the Drawings and as follows:
1. Design the decking for the superimposed dead and live loads as indicated, on a
simple span condition with a limiting deflection of L/240, steel stress of 0.60 FY.
2. Comply with other design criteria as indicated in metal decking notes and design
criteria notes.
C. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips for openings between decking and
other construction, of not less than 0.045-inch min. (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to
provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. Finish
to match decking finish.
D. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071-inch min. (14 gage) sheet metal
with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. Provide sump pans of
adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches
wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface unless otherwise
Bridger Garage Repairs METAL DECKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 31 00 - 3
shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field by
others. Finish to match decking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein.
B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
C. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or
deflection.
D. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to
prevent overloading of structural members.
E. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.
3.02 FASTENING DECK UNITS
A. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by mechanical fasteners spaced not
more than 12 inches o.c. with a minimum of two screws per unit at each support.
B. Use mechanical fasteners at 36 inches o.c. for fastening end closures.
C. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at intervals not
exceeding 36 inches o.c., using fasteners.
D. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist uplift loading as shown in
drawings.
E. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
F. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces
as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown.
G. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL-approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes
of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling
construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures.
Bridger Garage Repairs METAL DECKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 31 00 - 4
1. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14 inches o.c. in both directions, not over
9 inches from walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and mechanical fasten to
decking surface. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one fastener
at each corner.
I. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof
decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Mechanical fasten into
position to provide a complete decking installation.
END OF SECTION 05 31 00
Bridger Garage Repairs MISCELLANEOUS METALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 50 00/1
SECTION 05 50 00
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 specification Sections apply to the work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of Miscellaneous Metal items are typically shown on the drawings or called for
in the specifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication to verify and supplement dimensions shown on Repair Drawings, where
possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Materials shall be properly marked and match-marked where field assembly so
requires. The sequence of shipment shall be such as to expedite and minimize the field
handling of materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation
instruction for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work,
including painting products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor bolt installation. Fabrication
shall not proceed until shop drawings have been reviewed. Fabrication, assembly and
erection shall conform to reviewed shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed
to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
Bridger Garage Repairs MISCELLANEOUS METALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 50 00/2
B. Steel Plates: ASTM A36 unless noted otherwise.
C. Steel Angles at Expansion Joint shall be hot-dip galvanized: ASTM A153.
D. Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A283, Grade C.
E. Concrete Inserts: Threaded type, galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM
A47 or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip
galvanized, ASTM A153.
F. Non-shrink Nonferrous Grout: Five-Star Non-Shrink Grout, or approved equal.
G. All Miscellaneous metal components shall be factory hot-dipped galvanized and any
abrasions shall be field corrected.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners unless otherwise noted. Select fasteners for the
type, grade and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307-86a, Grade A.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561C-70.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92B-75B-75.
E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92B-74B-74.
F. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588C-74, type, class and style as required.
G. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84A-69.
2.03 PRIMERS AND PAINT FINISHES – SEE SPEC SECTION 09900.
2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Workmanship:
1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and
thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to
dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various
components of work.
2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch
unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible
Bridger Garage Repairs MISCELLANEOUS METALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 50 00/3
without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
3. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At
exposed connections grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend
with adjoining surfaces.
4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not
shown, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
a. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate
support for intended use.
b. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to
receive finish hardware and similar items.
B. Galvanizing:
1. Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized, as
follows:
a. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
b. ASTM 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,
bars and strip 1/8 thick and heavier.
c. ASTM A386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.
C. Shop Painting:
1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work except surfaces and edges to be field welded
and members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry
which are galvanized, unless otherwise specified.
2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat.
Clean in accordance with SSPC SP-3-63 “Power Tool Cleaning” to remove all scale,
rust, and foreign matter after first solvent cleaning to remove all oil and grease.
3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 63
"Solvent Cleaning".
4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide uniform dry film
thickness of 2 to 4 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.
5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply two coats of paint to
surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to
distinguish it from the first.
Bridger Garage Repairs MISCELLANEOUS METALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 50 00/4
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Rough Hardware:
1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,
dowels and other miscellaneous steel shapes as required.
2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation
of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including,
threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,
and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation
of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and
elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry or similar construction.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections
which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld,
cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrications, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc-
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
E. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections and
abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 9900 of
these specifications.
Bridger Garage Repairs MISCELLANEOUS METALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 50 00/5
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 1
SECTION 05 52 16
PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The extent of work included in this Section is shown on the Drawings and is specified as
follows:
1. Prestressed barrier cable assemblies for pedestrian guards.
B. The work includes furnishing and installing an engineered barrier cable guard system
consisting of prestressed seven-wire steel strands and complete with all related sleeves,
supports and anchors, jacks and jacking, distribution plates, spacer bars, accessories, devices,
etc.
C. The work also consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
1. Furnish and install all system materials intended for use in aggressive environments.
2. Perform all prestressing operations, including but, not limited to stressing, backstressing
and anchoring tendons.
3. Keep records of stressing operations.
4. Terminating tendon ends (after Engineer’s review) and patching stressing pockets (as
applicable).
5. See Structural Drawings for additional general notes applying to work under this section.
In case of discrepancy between the Specifications and the Drawings, the most stringent
will govern as determined by the Engineer.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Barrier Cable: A steel prestressing strand meeting the requirements of this Specification.
Barrier cables may interchangeably be referred to as either “cables”, “tendons” or “strands”.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard Systems, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated and in compliance with the design intent as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
1. Employ a professional engineer, registered in the state where the project is located, to
perform design. Professional Engineer shall sign and seal Shop Drawings and
Calculations submitted for review.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 2
B. Structural Performance: All guard assemblies, including cables, anchors and connections, shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads within limits and under
conditions indicated in the Structural General Notes and on the Drawings:
1. Pedestrian Guard Loads: Cable guards shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
a. Top Cable:
1) Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
2) Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
b. Cables Below Top Cable (Infill):
1) Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
2) Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Vehicular Guard Loads:
a. Pedestrian guard loads are applicable to all vehicle barrier systems and are not
required to act concurrently with loads applicable to those systems.
b. Vehicle Barrier Systems for Passenger Vehicles:
1) The loading selected must be that producing a more unfavorable effect of
the following:
a) Article 4.5.3. of ASCE 7-10, “Minimum loads for Buildings and other
Structures”.
b) Local governing building code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, anchor details and
installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of guard assemblies,
including painting products and patching materials.
B. Samples: Submit one (1) sample of all Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of guard assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide templates for anchor bolt installation. All shop drawings shall be
signed and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the project is
located.
1. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:
a. Tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons.
b. Final effective forces of each tendon. Type and description of a method to
ascertain that this force has been achieved.
c. Details, location and arrangement of tendon dead end and stressing end
anchorage devices. These details shall be thoroughly coordinated with the
placement of the corresponding column and beam reinforcement to ascertain
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 3
ability to install anchorages without interference with other components within
the supporting structure or the joints between structural support members.
d. Details and/or description of procedure ascertaining proper field connection
between the cable and anchor as per the system manufacturer’s requirements.
D. Calculations: Submit calculations as follows for review and acceptance by the Engineer of
Record (AOR) along with the shop drawings for each portion of the work. All calculations shall
be signed and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the project is
located.
1. Calculations of anticipated elongations based on the required effective prestress for
each type of cable and anchor. When seating loss is not available, use 3/8" for a wedge
based anchorage.
2. Calculations of bearing stress applied to the structure by the proposed anchoring device
and engineering opinion on the adequacy of the structural component to carry this
bearing stress.
E. Test Results and Certifications: Submit the following for review and acceptance by the
Engineer not less than three weeks prior to commencement of work:
1. Mill Tests: Results of certified mill tests (including typical stress-strain curve) for each
production lot from which project material will be taken. Such results shall include
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength, yield strength, elongation, cross-sectional area
and modulus of elasticity of the material tested.
2. Equipment Calibration Tests: Results of certified calibration tests made within the last
three months by an independent testing agency of all stressing equipment to be used on
the project. Stressing equipment shall be calibrated as a unit especially when consisting
of jack, gage, and pump. Components of calibrated units may not be interchanged
during the course of the work without recalibration. Contractor shall submit method of
identification of all stressing units. Calibration reports shall include a curve relating jack
forces to gage readings. For other types of stressing equipment and/or anchoring
systems, submit respective calibration tests relating gage readings to attained force.
F. Stressing Record: The Installer shall provide a stressing record for all tendons to the Engineer.
This record shall be in a form in conformance with recommendations of PTI and acceptable to
the Engineer, and include as a minimum for each tendon its mark, location and length,
stressing unit identification, required and actual field gauge reading at each anchorage, and
signatures of the pump/gage operator and the Testing Agency’s representative witnessing the
stressing operation.
G. Certifications: Provide certifications indicating compliance with the Quality Assurance article
below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 4
1. Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards, latest edition, except
as herein modified:
a. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1) ASCE 7-10 – “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
b. Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI):
1) "Guide Specifications for Post-Tensioning Materials".
2) "Specifications for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons".
3) "Post-Tensioning Manual".
4) "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons".
5) “Specification for Seven-Wire Prestressing Steel Strand for Barrier Cable
Applications”.
c. See Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals for additional information pertaining
to fabricated steel assemblies.
2. In case of any discrepancy or conflicting requirements between codes and/or standards,
the most stringent requirements will govern as determined by the Engineer.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. All stressing of tendons shall be under the immediate control of an Installer experienced
in this type of work, who has successfully performed a minimum of five (5) previous
installations similar to the one involved in this Contract. The Installer shall exercise
close check and rigid control of all operations as necessary for full compliance with all
contract requirements.
2. Work shall be supervised by individuals experienced in post-tensioning construction.
Qualifications of project supervisor(s) shall be included in bid submittal.
C. Inspection of Barrier Cable Placement and Stressing Operations:
1. An Independent Testing Agency will be retained by the Owner to observe and verify all
post-tensioning work as specified this Section.
D. Personnel Required Onsite:
1. Contractor shall have supervisory personnel onsite at all times during tendon stressing
operations.
2. Installer shall have supervisory personnel onsite at all times during tendon placement,
and stressing operations. Name and position of such supervisory personnel shall be
provided to the Contractor and the Engineer at the start of work but not later than
seven (7) days prior to tensioning.
3. The Testing Agency representative shall be onsite at all times during tendon layout,
placement, and stressing operations. Stressing operations shall not proceed without a
Testing Agency's representative present during operations.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 5
4. The Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System Manufacturer shall supervise, as a
minimum, the first occurrence of each stressing operation with subsequent monitoring
as deemed necessary.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver guard systems and related components in protective packaging and store components
to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion and other construction activities.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for guard systems. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items in time for installation.
B. The prestressed barrier cable assemblies are solely intended to act as guards as prescribed by
the performance requirements of this Section. No ancillary attachments shall be made to any
prestressed barrier cable assemblies without prior approval by the Engineer in writing.
1.8 INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
A. Independent Testing Agency’s Services related to Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard Systems
Work:
1. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall observe the condition of tendons and anchorages in
place prior to concreting (as applicable) and again prior to stressing. Any unsatisfactory
condition of tendons or anchors must immediately be brought to the attention of the
responsible supervisor, who must address said condition in a timely fashion to the
satisfaction of the Testing Agency’s Inspector, Any and all conditions not properly
addressed by the Contractor prior to stressing, must be recorded and brought to the
attention of the Engineer in a most expedient way prior to stressing.
2. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall review the contractors stressing and backstressing
procedure, and witness the stressing operation and recording. In the event anchoring
system for barrier cables does not require backstressing, verify proper connection of
anchorage to cable.
3. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall review the contractor’s tendon terminating
procedure and the condition of terminated tendons prior to grouting of pockets or
installation of anchor end caps or corrosion-protective coating.
4. Where fabricated steel items are utilized within Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard
Systems and/or where the guard systems are attached to other building components by
means of welding, bolting and/or drilled-in inserts, the Testing Agency shall perform
inspection and tests as required by Section 01 45 00 and the applicable Division 5
Sections.
5. See Section 01 45 00 for additional requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 6
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers offering systems of products complying with the requirements for Prestressed
Barrier Cable Guard Systems include the following:
1. AMSYSCO, Inc.
2. DYWIDAG-Systems International USA Inc.
3. Suncoast Post-Tension, Ltd.
4. VStructural, LLC (VSL)
5. Another manufacturer approved based on equivalent qualifications demonstrated by
submitting information relative to record of successful projects of similar type and
complexity within the past 5 (five) years, participation in the industry and professional
organizations, and at least 3 (three) positive client references.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cables, anchors, tensioning, grouting, etc. as indicated on the Drawings. All
components are to be hot-dip galvanized. Comply with PTI “Specification for Seven-Wire
Prestressing Steel Strand for Barrier Cable Applications”.
B. Barrier Cables: Seven-wire steel strand, 0.5 in. diameter, galvanized per ASTM A475, Extra high
Strength Grade, Class A with a minimum breaking strength of 26,500lbs. All strand to be
manufactured by a single source.
C. Anchorages: All castings and machined barrel anchors shall comply with PTI requirements
applicable to corrosive environments. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, provide
capped anchors with exterior thread and corresponding galvanized metal or otherwise
corrosion resistant caps acceptable to the Engineer.
1. Wedges shall be designed to preclude premature failure of the barrier strand due to
notch or pinching effects under test load conditions specified in Section 2.2.1.1 and
2.2.1.2 in PTI’s “Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons”
D. Related Steel Components and Fabrications: Where steel brackets and supports are indicated
in the Drawings, these shall comply with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous
Metals.
1. Finish: All related steel components and fabrications shall be hot dip galvanized per
Section 05 05 15 – Hot Dip Galvanizing.
E. Manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant assembly components shall be hot dip galvanized
and shall conform to ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, As applicable.
F. Sleeves: General Contractor to coordinate the provision of PVC pipe sleeves to accommodate
cables passing through structural concrete items as indicated in the Drawings.
G. Grout Materials for Stressing Pockets (where specifically detailed only):
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 7
1. Non-metallic Shrinkage-resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-
staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland Cement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasticizing, water reducing agents and corrosion inhibitors,
complying with ASTM C 1107, grade B and Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C621. Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. “Euco NS”- The Euclid Chemical Co.
b. “Crystex” - L & M Construction Chemicals.
c. Masterflow 713” or Masterflow 928Plus” - Master Builders
d. “Five Star Grout” - U.S. Grout Corp.
e. Approved Equivalent.
2. When specifically directed by the Engineer, adjust color of the pre-manufactured
product by mixing it with trial-and-error selected quantity of white cement, to attain
final cured color of the patch as close as possible to the surrounding concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, structural support, sleeves, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete for
installation of Cable Guard Systems.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide system as indicated on the Drawings installing cables in straight lines and at true
heights.
B. Trim ends of PVC pipe sleeves flush with face of concrete. Patch spalling around PVC pipe
sleeves as directed by the Engineer.
C. Install fabricated anchorage, attachment and support items as shown in the final approved
Shop Drawings.
D. Stressing Procedure for Cables:
1. Backstress and stress cables to seat wedges as shown on the Drawings. Follow PTI
recommended procedures. Consult with Engineer concerning stressing/backstressing
against materials other than concrete.
2. Wedges shall be seated at 80% minimum ultimate tensile strength (MUTS) of the strand.
Bridger Garage Repairs PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 05 52 16 - 8
3. Coordinate jack placement and bracing as required to protect any structural members
being attached to from damage during tensioning process.
E. Upon completion of the stressing and receiving the Engineer’s approval of the stressing record,
terminate excess length of cable by an approved method and apply two coats of galvanizing
compound and/or install manufacturer’s screw-on cap tightly.
F. Final Disposition of Cable Anchors:
1. For anchors left exposed in the final condition, provide approved caps or cover
assemblies to completely conceal trimmed ends of cables, unless otherwise detailed on
the Drawings.
2. For anchors recessed in concrete construction, fill pockets with non-shrink grout for
smooth, flush condition.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Galvanized Coatings:
1. Field Repair: For field touch up of hot-dip galvanized components, repair using zinc rich
coating or “cold galvanizing” compound. Provide factory mixed and prepared organic
binder, zinc-rich paint specifically formulated for use on steel surfaces and for repair of
hot dip galvanized steel. Minimum 95% by weight of dry film of “ultra-pure” zinc dust
per ASTM D520 Type III. Provide a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils.
END OF SECTION 05 52 16
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-1 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
SECTION 05 52 16
PRESTRESSED BARRIER CABLE GUARD SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The extent of work included in this Section is shown on the Drawings and is specified as
follows: 1. Prestressed barrier cable assemblies for vehicular guards.
2. Prestressed barrier cable assemblies for pedestrian guards.
B. The work includes furnishing and installing an engineered barrier cable guard system
consisting of prestressed seven-wire steel strands and complete with all related sleeves, supports and anchors, jacks and jacking, distribution plates, spacer bars, accessories,
devices, etc.
C. The work also consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work: 1. Furnish and install all system materials intended for use in aggressive
environments. 2. Perform all prestressing operations, including but, not limited to stressing,
backstressing and anchoring tendons. 3. Keep records of stressing operations.
4. Terminating tendon ends (after Architect’s review) and patching stressing pockets (as applicable).
5. See Structural Drawings for additional general notes applying to work under this section. In case of discrepancy between the Specifications and the Drawings,
the most stringent will govern as determined by the Architect.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Barrier Cable: A steel prestressing strand meeting the requirements of this Specification. Barrier cables may interchangeably be referred to as either “cables”, “tendons” or
“strands”.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard Systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated and in compliance with the design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents.
1. Employ a professional engineer, registered in the state where the project is located, to perform design. Professional Engineer shall sign and seal Shop
Drawings and Calculations submitted for review.
B. Structural Performance: All guard assemblies, including cables, anchors and
connections, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads within limits and under conditions indicated in the Structural General Notes and on the
Drawings: 1. Pedestrian Guard Loads: See Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals.
2. Vehicular Guard Loads:
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-2 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
a. Pedestrian guard loads are applicable to all vehicle barrier systems and are not required to act concurrently with loads applicable to those
systems. b. Vehicle Barrier Systems for Passenger Vehicles:
1) The loading selected must be that producing a more unfavorable effect of the following:
a) Article 4.5.3. of ASCE 7-10, “Minimum loads for Buildings and other Structures”.
b) Local governing building code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of guard
assemblies, including painting products and patching materials.
B. Samples: Submit one (1) sample of all Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of guard assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor bolt installation. All shop drawings shall
be signed and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the project is located.
1. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: a. Tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons.
b. Final effective forces of each tendon. Type and description of a method to ascertain that this force has been achieved.
c. Details, location and arrangement of tendon dead end and stressing end anchorage devices. These details shall be thoroughly coordinated with
the placement of the corresponding column and beam reinforcement to ascertain ability to install anchorages without interference with other
components within the supporting structure or the joints between structural support members.
d. Details and/or description of procedure ascertaining proper field connection between the cable and anchor as per the system
manufacturer’s requirements.
D. Calculations: Submit calculations as follows for review and acceptance by the Architect of
Record (AOR) along with the shop drawings for each portion of the work. All calculations shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the
project is located. 1. Calculations of anticipated elongations based on the required effective prestress
for each type of cable and anchor. When seating loss is not available, use 3/8" for a wedge based anchorage.
2. Calculations of bearing stress applied to the structure by the proposed anchoring device and engineering opinion on the adequacy of the structural component to
carry this bearing stress.
E. Test Results and Certifications: Submit the following for review and acceptance by the
Architect not less than three weeks prior to commencement of work: 1. Mill Tests: Results of certified mill tests (including typical stress-strain curve) for
each production lot from which project material will be taken. Such results shall include guaranteed ultimate tensile strength, yield strength, elongation, cross-
sectional area and modulus of elasticity of the material tested.
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-3 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
2. Equipment Calibration Tests: Results of certified calibration tests made within the last three months by an independent testing agency of all stressing
equipment to be used on the project. Stressing equipment shall be calibrated as a unit especially when consisting of jack, gage, and pump. Components of
calibrated units may not be interchanged during the course of the work without recalibration. Contractor shall submit method of identification of all stressing
units. Calibration reports shall include a curve relating jack forces to gage readings. For other types of stressing equipment and/or anchoring systems,
submit respective calibration tests relating gage readings to attained force.
F. Stressing Record: The Installer shall provide a stressing record for all tendons to the
Architect. This record shall be in a form in conformance with recommendations of PTI and acceptable to the Architect, and include as a minimum for each tendon its mark,
location and length, stressing unit identification, required and actual field gauge reading at each anchorage, and signatures of the pump/gage operator and the Testing Agency’s
representative witnessing the stressing operation.
G. Certifications: Provide certifications indicating compliance with the Quality Assurance
article below.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards 1. Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards, latest edition,
except as herein modified: a. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1) ASCE 7-10 – “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
b. Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI) 1) "Guide Specifications for Post-Tensioning Materials".
2) "Specifications for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons". 3) "Post-Tensioning Manual".
4) "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons".
5) “Specification for Seven-Wire Prestressing Steel Strand for Barrier Cable Applications”.
c. See Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals for additional information pertaining to fabricated steel assemblies.
2. In case of any discrepancy or conflicting requirements between codes and/or standards, the most stringent requirements will govern as determined by the
Architect.
B. Installer Qualifications
1. All stressing of tendons shall be under the immediate control of an Installer experienced in this type of work, who has successfully performed a minimum of
five (5) previous installations similar to the one involved in this Contract. The Installer shall exercise close check and rigid control of all operations as
necessary for full compliance with all contract requirements. 2. Work shall be supervised by individuals experienced in post-tensioning
construction. Qualifications of project supervisor(s) shall be included in bid submittal.
C. Inspection of Barrier Cable Placement and Stressing Operations 1. An Independent Testing Agency will be retained by the Owner to observe and
verify all post-tensioning work as specified this Section.
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-4 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
D. Personnel Required Onsite 1. Contractor shall have supervisory personnel onsite at all times during tendon
stressing operations. 2. Installer shall have supervisory personnel onsite at all times during tendon
placement, and stressing operations. Name and position of such supervisory personnel shall be provided to the Contractor and the Architect at the start of
work but not later than seven (7) days prior to tensioning. 3. The Testing Agency representative shall be onsite at all times during tendon
layout, placement, and stressing operations. Stressing operations shall not proceed without a Testing Agency's representative present during operations.
4. The Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System Manufacturer shall supervise, as a minimum, the first occurrence of each stressing operation with subsequent
monitoring as deemed necessary.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver guard systems and related components in protective packaging and store components to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion and other construction activities.
1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for guard systems. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items in time for installation.
B. The prestressed barrier cable assemblies are solely intended to act as guards as
prescribed by the performance requirements of this Section. No ancillary attachments shall be made to any prestressed barrier cable assemblies without prior approval by the
Architect in writing.
1.08 INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
A. Independent Testing Agency’s Services related to Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard Systems Work:
1. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall observe the condition of tendons and anchorages in place prior to concreting (as applicable) and again prior to
stressing. Any unsatisfactory condition of tendons or anchors must immediately be brought to the attention of the responsible supervisor, who must address said
condition in a timely fashion to the satisfaction of the Testing Agency’s Inspector, Any and all conditions not properly addressed by the Contractor prior to
stressing, must be recorded and brought to the attention of the Architect in a most expedient way prior to stressing.
2. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall review the contractors stressing and backstressing procedure, and witness the stressing operation and recording. In
the event anchoring system for barrier cables does not require backstressing, verify proper connection of anchorage to cable.
3. The Testing Agency’s Inspector shall review the contractor’s tendon terminating procedure and the condition of terminated tendons prior to grouting of pockets or
installation of anchor end caps or corrosion-protective coating. 4. Where fabricated steel items are utilized within Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard
Systems and/or where the guard systems are attached to other building components by means of welding, bolting and/or drilled-in inserts, the Testing
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-5 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
Agency shall perform inspection and tests as required by Section 01 45 00 and the applicable Division 5 Sections.
5. See Section 01 45 00 for additional requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers offering systems of products complying with the requirements for
Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard Systems include the following: 1. AMSYSCO, Inc.
2. DYWIDAG-Systems International USA Inc. 3. Suncoast Post-Tension, Ltd.
4. VStructural, LLC (VSL) 5. Another manufacturer approved based on equivalent qualifications demonstrated
by submitting information relative to record of successful projects of similar type and complexity within the past 5 (five) years, participation in the industry and
professional organizations, and at least 3 (three) positive client references.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cables, anchors, tensioning, grouting, etc. as indicated on the Drawings. All components are to be hot-dip galvanized. Comply with PTI “Specification
for Seven-Wire Prestressing Steel Strand for Barrier Cable Applications”.
B. Barrier Cables: Seven-wire steel strand, 0.5 in. diameter, galvanized per ASTM A475,
Extra high Strength Grade, Class A with a minimum breaking strength of 26,500lbs. All strand to be manufactured by a single source.
C. Anchorages: All castings and machined barrel anchors shall comply with PTI requirements applicable to corrosive environments. Where specifically indicated on the
Drawings, provide capped anchors with exterior thread and corresponding galvanized metal or otherwise corrosion resistant caps acceptable to the Architect.
1. Wedges shall be designed to preclude premature failure of the barrier strand due to notch or pinching effects under test load conditions specified in Section 2.2.1.1
and 2.2.1.2 in PTI’s “Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons”
D. Related Steel Components and Fabrications: Where steel brackets and supports are
indicated in the Drawings, these shall comply with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals.
1. Finish: All related steel components and fabrications shall be hot dip galvanized per Section 05 05 15 – Hot Dip Galvanizing.
E. Manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant assembly components shall be hot dip galvanized and shall conform to ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, As applicable.
F. Sleeves: General Contractor to coordinate the provision of PVC pipe sleeves to accommodate cables passing through structural concrete items as indicated in the
Drawings.
G. Grout Materials for Stressing Pockets (where specifically detailed only):
1. Non-metallic Shrinkage-resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland Cement,
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-6 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing, water reducing agents and corrosion inhibitors, complying with ASTM C 1107, grade B and Army Corps of
Engineers CRD-C621. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. “Euco NS” - The Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Crystex” - L & M Construction Chemicals.
c. Masterflow 713” or Masterflow 928Plus” - Master Builders d. “Five Star Grout” - U.S. Grout Corp.
e. Approved Equivalent.
H. When specifically directed by the Architect, adjust color of the pre-manufactured product
by mixing it with trial-and-error selected quantity of white cement, to attain final cured color of the patch as close as possible to the surrounding concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. {Retain option in paragraph below for electric operation.}
B. Examine substrates, structural support, sleeves, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete for installation of Cable Guard Systems.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Provide system as indicated on the Drawings installing cables in straight lines and at true
heights.
B. Trim ends of PVC pipe sleeves flush with face of concrete. Patch spalling around PVC
pipe sleeves as directed by the Architect.
C. Install fabricated anchorage, attachment and support items as shown in the final
approved Shop Drawings.
D. Stressing Procedure for Cables
1. Backstress and stress cables to seat wedges as shown on the Drawings. Follow PTI recommended procedures. Consult with Architect concerning
stressing/backstressing against materials other than concrete. 2. Wedges shall be seated at 80% minimum ultimate tensile strength (MUTS) of the
strand. 3. Coordinate jack placement and bracing as required to protect any structural
members being attached to from damage during tensioning process.
FG 247C001 / DI 60-16124 Soboba Replacement Casino 24 Mar 2017 – Core & Shell Permit Package 05 52 16-7 Prestressed Barrier Cable Guard System
E. Upon completion of the stressing and receiving the Architect’s approval of the stressing record, terminate excess length of cable by an approved method and apply two coats of
galvanizing compound and/or install manufacturer’s screw-on cap tightly. 1. Final Disposition of Cable Anchors:
F. For anchors left exposed in the final condition, provide approved caps or cover assemblies to completely conceal trimmed ends of cables, unless otherwise detailed on
the Drawings.
G. For anchors recessed in concrete construction, fill pockets with non-shrink grout for
smooth, flush condition.
3.04 REPAIRS
3.05 Galvanized Coatings
A. Field Repair: For field touch up of hot-dip galvanized components, repair using zinc rich
coating or “cold galvanizing” compound. Provide factory mixed and prepared organic binder, zinc-rich paint specifically formulated for use on steel surfaces and for repair of
hot dip galvanized steel. Minimum 95% by weight of dry film of “ultra-pure” zinc dust per ASTM D520 Type III. Provide a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 7
THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/1
SECTION 07 19 00
CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide concrete penetrating sealer Category A on all horizontal supported concrete
deck surfaces, as specified in the drawings and turned 6” up of all vertical concrete and
masonry surfaces adjacent to horizontal deck surfaces. The sealer shall be compatible
with paint for parking stall re-stripping and pavement markings.
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Codes and Standards:
1) Specified products in Category A (40% solid Silane sealer) shall comply with the
provision of the following specification and standards, except as otherwise
noted. (Not Used)
a) NCHRP 244 procedure - Series II & IV.
b) Scaling Resistance of Concrete (ASTM C-672) - No Scaling.
c) Alberta Department of Transportation and Utilities B388 Penetrating
Sealer for Traffic Bearing Surfaces Type 1B - Water Repellency after
Abrasion (minimum) 86.0%.
d) National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards For
Architectural Coatings (40CFR Part 59) limiting VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds) to no more than 600 grams/liter.
2) Specified products in Category B (100% solid silane sealer) shall comply with the
provision of the following specification and standards, except as otherwise
noted.
a) NCHRP 244 procedure - Series II & IV.
b) Scaling Resistance of Concrete (ASTM C-672) - No Scaling.
c) Alberta Department of Transportation and Utilities B388 Penetrating
Sealer for Traffic Bearing Surfaces Type 1B - Water Repellency after
Abrasion (minimum) 86.0%.
d) VOC Requirements: Where applicable, the manufacturers shall ensure
that all components of specified products do not exceed volatile organic
compound (VOC) limits of 600 g/l.
e) Projects in the following locations have stricter VOC limits of 400 g/l.
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/2
Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Maine, Maryland,
Massachusetts, Michigan, New York, New Jersey, New Hampshire, Ohio,
Pennsylvania and Washington DC.
Additionally, Virginia as follows: Arlington, Fairfax, Loudoun, Prince
William, Stafford, Spotsylvania, Charles City, Chesterfield, Hanover,
Henrico and Prince George Counties. Also Cities of Alexandria, Fairfax,
Falls Church, Manassas, Manassas Park, Fredericksburg, Colonial
Heights, Hopewell, Petersburg and Richmond.
Additionally, California as follows: Shasta, Tehama, Butte, Colusa, Yolo,
Sonoma (northern half), El Dorado, San Luis Obispo and San Diego
Counties.
Additionally, Arizona as follows: Maricopa County (396 g/l)
e) Projects in the following locations have stricter VOC limits of 350 g/l.
California as follows: Imperial, Riverside, San Bernardino, Orange, Los
Angeles, Ventura, Santa Barbara, Kern (western half), Tulare, Kings,
Monterey, San Benito, Fresno, Madera, Merced, Stanislaus, Santa Clara,
Santa Cruz, San Mateo, Alameda, San Francisco, Marin, Contra Costa,
San Joaquin, Solano, Sonoma (southern half) Placer, Yuba and Sutte
Counties.
Also, Utah as follows: Box Elder, Cache, Weber, Davis, Tooele, Salt Lake
and Utah Counties.
B. Field Testing Acceptance:
1) Category A - (Not used) Meet or exceed the following requirements for this
project based on testing performed on a minimum of three, 3 inch diameter (or
larger) core samples removed from the treated area.
a) Repellency Rating (Waterproofing Performance) - 80% or better, based
on comparison of untreated versus treated samples. Test procedure for
waterproofing performance shall be according to ASTM D 6489-99,
“Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Absorption of
Hardened Concrete Treated with a Water Repellent Coating”.
b) Penetration (1 application) 1/8 inch minimum (3 mm), based on the
average of a series of measurements on the split face of core samples.
2) Category B –Meet or exceed the following requirements for this project based
on testing performed on a minimum of three, 3 inch diameter (or larger) core
samples removed from the treated area.
a) Repellency Rating (Waterproofing Performance) - 85% or better, based
on comparison of untreated versus treated samples. Test procedure for
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/3
waterproofing performance shall be according to ASTM D 6489-99,
“Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Absorption of
Hardened Concrete Treated with a Water Repellent Coating”.
b) Penetration (1 application) 1/4 inch minimum (6 mm), based on the
average of a series of measurements on the split face of core samples.
C. Sealer Coordination:
1) Review other sections of these specifications in which curing compounds or
paints, are to be provided on concrete surfaces to be sealed to ensure
compatibility with the concrete sealer.
D. Warranty:
1) The system manufacturer shall furnish the Owner a written single-source
performance warranty that the Concrete Penetrating Sealer System will be free
of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency and meet or exceed
the requirements of Part B for a ten (10) year period from the date of
substantial completion of the work provided under this section of the
specification.
2) Any required repairs under the warranty shall be made by the system
manufacturer. The required written warranty shall be provided by the system
manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product, application and surface preparation specifications,
testing data and warranty for approval prior to sealing concrete decks.
B. When payment for sealer application is based on square foot area of application, the
area used in calculations shall be horizontal surfaces only.
C. As a condition for payment of the sealer application, the contractor must submit an
invoice indicating the delivery and site receipt of the quantity of material calculated and
designated for this project. In addition to the calculated quantity, the invoice shall also
reflect the project address, or be designated for use on this project, if delivered to the
contractor’s address. No leftover material from previous projects will be permitted for
use on this project.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not proceed with application of materials if ambient temperature is below
20 degrees F. or if ice or frost are covering the substrate. For Enviroseal 40, do
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/4
not proceed with application of materials if ambient temperature is below 40
degrees F.
2. Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface temperature
exceeds 100 degrees F.
3. Do not proceed with application of materials in rainy conditions or if rain is
anticipated within 8 hours after application. Materials shall not be applied to
damp substrates. The surface should be sufficiently dry to observe the spray
pattern during application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALER MATERIAL
A. Provide a clear liquid Category A type sealing compound, which will penetrate slab
surfaces to provide a surface which is resistant to salts, de-icer chemicals, moisture,
gasoline, oil and acids. Sealer material shall not permanently alter the appearance or
surface texture of concrete surfaces. The product shall be compatible with pavement
markings.
B. Sealer material shall be one of the products offered by the manufacturer's listed below.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
1) Sikaguard 701 W. Apply at application rate of 200 sf/gal.
20 Evonik Degussa Corporation –Apply at application rate of 200 sf/gal.
2) BASF Building Systems Inc. – Apply at application rate of 200 sf/gal.
3) LymTal International –Apply at application rate of 200 sf/gal
C. All penetrating sealers applied shall contain fugitive dye to demonstrate complete and
thorough application to surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive sealer to assure that conditions are acceptable for
application of materials. Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days.
B. Remove dirt, dust and materials that will interfere with the proper and effective
application of the water repellent coating.
C. All caulking, patching and joint sealants should be installed prior to application of this
product.
3.02 INITIAL TEST APPLICATION AND TESTING
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/5
A. Test Procedure:
1) Prior to full scale surface preparation and application of selected material, a trial
application shall be conducted. The locations shall be 11 feet by 11 feet in size
for products applied at 125 square feet per gallon, 12 feet 3 inches by 12 feet 3
inches for products applied at 150 square feet per gallon, 13 feet 3 inches by 13
feet 3 inches for products applied at 175 square feet per gallon and 14 feet by
14 feet for products applied at 200 square feet per gallon, at a location
determined by the Architect. The preferred location will be on a sloping ramp.
2) The trial area shall be cleaned according to manufacturer's recommendations in
the same manner as planned for the entire project. This may include sweeping
and cleaning with compressed air, water cleaning under pressure or
shotblasting. For the purposes of this test only, sandblasting is an acceptable
substitute for shotblasting.
3) Upon completion of surface preparation, a core will be removed from the
cleaned surface and tested for water absorption. This is the Untreated Water
Absorption value. The test area will then be treated with one gallon of the
selected material. From the treated area, two core samples shall be removed.
Both cores are to be tested for Treated Water Absorption and split with a chisel
and dye tested for depth of sealer penetration. The repellency rating is
calculated on the basis of untreated and treated water absorption values.
4) Once field test results are obtained, which meets or exceeds requirements of
Section 1.03.B.1.a and 1.03.B.1.b., the contractor will be authorized to perform
full scale surface preparation and application of the selected material. Do not
proceed with application unless directed in writing by the Architect and Material
Manufacturer.
5) Cost of trial area application and testing shall be included in the contractor's
price for sealer installation. Testing shall be conducted by the Architect or his
designee. Additional quality control testing, if desired by the Owner in other
areas or subsequent to the installation to determine warranty performance,
shall be paid for by the Owner.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Product shall be applied at a rate as specified above. Do not dilute or alter the material
B. Preferred method of application is with low pressure (15 PSI) airless spray equipment or
with a heavily-saturated brush or roller. Spray equipment should be equipped with
solvent resistant gaskets and hoses.
C. When applying by brush or roller, care will be taken to ensure that sufficient material is
being applied to thoroughly saturate the treatment surfaces maintaining the
appropriate square foot coverage rate required.
1) Product shall be applied to horizontal surfaces in a single saturating application.
Bridger Garage Repairs CLEAR PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALERS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 19 00/6
2)Sufficient material shall be applied so that treated surfaces remain wet for a few
minutes before penetration into the surface.
3)Surface residues, pools and puddles shall be broomed out thoroughly until they
completely penetrate into the surface.
4)Treated surfaces shall be protected from rain and other surface water for a
period of not less than eight (8) hours after application.
5)Treated surfaces shall be protected from excessive foot and vehicular traffic for
a period of not less than eight (8) hours after application.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A.When the work of this Section is complete, and at such other times as directed, remove
surplus and waste materials, debris, rubbish, equipment, and implements from the site,
and leave the work in a clean, neat and acceptable condition, as approved by the
Architect.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 92 00/1
SECTION 07 92 00
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:
A.Furnish labor, materials and equipment for sealing and caulking of cracks, construction
or control joints and cove in the reinforced concrete structural slabs as shown on
drawings or designated by the Consultant. The sealant shall be compatible with any
specified waterproofing membrane base coat material.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS:
A.The sealant shall be installed in floor cracks, construction and/or control joints in the
areas shown on drawings or designated by the Consultant. In the case of repair of
existing cracks which are sealed or filled with other materials, the existing sealant
material shall be raked out and the exposed concrete cleaned by sandblasting or
grinding at those locations designated for repair.
1.04 FULL RESPONSIBILITY:
A.System manufacturer will have the full responsibility for: (1) Instructing the Contractor
on the required configuration of joints and (2) Reviewing and approving tooled joints
constructed as a part of surface preparation prior to installing the sealant.
1.05 GUARANTEE:
A.The Contractor shall provide a single source performance guarantee that the joint
system repaired, including related work in the slab installed by the Contractor, will not
leak water or de-bond from adjacent concrete for a 5-year period starting from the date
of substantial completion. Any repairs required during the guarantee period starting
from the date of substantial completion shall be performed by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS:
A.The Contractor shall have a minimum of three years of experience in performing work
similar to that shown in the drawings and specifications.
B.The Contractor shall submit a list of five projects in which similar work to that specified
hereinbefore was successfully completed. The list shall contain the following for each of
the five projects:
Bridger Garage Repairs SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 92 00/2
1.Project Name
2.Owner of Project
3.Owner's Representative, Address and Telephone Number
4.Brief Description of Work
5.Cost of Portion of Work Similar to that Specified in this Section
6.Total Restoration Cost of Project
7.Date of Completion of Work
The sum of the costs of the five projects provided shall be a minimum of $50,000.
C.A full time on-site supervisor shall be provided by the contractor for the duration of the
sealant and caulking work. This supervisor shall have had a minimum of 2 years
documented supervisory experience with the products to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A.The joint sealant to be used for cracks and construction joints shall be two component
polyurethane sealants of the chemically curing type containing no asphalt, coal tar, or
plasticizers. The sealant shall be used with a compatible primer specified by the
manufacturer. Approved products for use are:
1."MasterSeal-SL-2” as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
2."Vulkem 245/255 or THC-900" as manufactured by Tremco
(www.tremcosealants.com)
3."Iso-Flex 880GB Sealant" as manufactured by LymTal International, Inc.
(www.lymtal.com)
4.“Sikaflex-2C-SL,” as manufactured by Sika Corporation (www.sikausa.com)
B.The sealant to be used shall meet or exceed the requirements of Interim Federal
Specification TT-S0027-E, Sealants Class A, Type 1 and 2. The sealant shall not de-bond
or fail while elongated 25 percent in a water immersion test, according to Federal
Specification TT-S-0027-E. When tested according to Paragraph 4.3.5. of Federal
Specification TT-S-0027-E, weight loss shall not be greater than 5 percent. Shore A
hardness under standard conditions shall be 25-30.
C.The cove sealant to be used shall be a non-sag, two component polyurethane sealants
of the chemically curing type containing no asphalt, coal tar, or plasticizers. The cove
joint sealant shall comply with Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A,
Corporation of Consultants CRD-C-506-72; ASTM C-920-79, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
Approved Cove Sealants are as follows:
Bridger Garage Repairs SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 92 00/3
1. "MasterSeal-NP-2" as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
2. "THC-901" as manufactured by Tremco (www.tremcosealants.com)
3. "Iso-Flex 881 NS Sealant" as manufactured by LymTal International, Inc.
(www.lymtal.com)
4. “Sikaflex-2C-NS,” as manufactured by Sika Corporation (www.sikausa.com)
D. The joint sealant to be used on the exterior, vertical control joints shall be a one-part,
fast curing, non-sag, silyl-terminated polyether elastomeric sealant. If necessary, the
sealant shall be used with a compatible primer specified by the manufacturer. Approved
products for use are:
1. "MasterSeal-NP-150” as manufactured by BASF Building Systems
(www.buildingsystems.basf.com)
2. “Iso-Flex 825” as manufactured by LymTal International, Inc. (www.lymtal.com)
Note: Color selection shall be by the Owner from standard choices available.
E. The manufacturer of the sealant system used in this project shall share responsibility for
all sealant work and joint preparation work in slab.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TYPICAL SURFACE PREPARATION:
The Contractor shall either grind the surface of all cracks and construction joints designated for
repair with sealant to the shape of 1/2" x 1/2" v-groove, or sawcut a square ½" x ½" groove,
grind sharp corner of groove and apply bond breaker to bottom horizontal surface. Edges of
cracks or joints to be sealed shall be of sound concrete. Prior to installing sealant, surfaces
shall be cleaned of foreign materials and debris, V-groove ground and primed.
3.02 RECORD OF SEALED CRACK AND JOINT LOCATIONS AND TYPES:
A. After determining the cracks and joints to be sealed and the detail types required, the
Contractor shall prepare scale shop drawings showing the sealed crack and/or joint
locations and submit them to the Consultant for his approval. The Shop Drawings
submitted shall be reviewed by the Consultant for the condition of the existing
cracks/joints, the size/shape of the routed crack, and the type of detail selected.
B. The Shop Drawings submitted shall be used as a record of the detail types used and the
measured number of linear feet of each sealed crack. Quantities of work done on a unit
price basis shall be recorded on the document and submitted to the Consultant with
Request for Payment.
Bridger Garage Repairs SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 92 00/4
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs EXPANSION JOINT SEALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 95 00/1
SECTION 07 95 00
EXPANSION JOINT SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and supervision to install watertight, traffic bearing
expansion joint seals in accordance with these specifications and as shown on the
drawings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.The manufacturer and approved applicator shall provide a 5 year guarantee that the
joint seal will not leak or fail from normal vehicular traffic. Any type of failure of the
new joint seal which occurs within the specified warranty period shall be repaired by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.Consult the Manufacturer's representative and establish the minimum provisions
required to ensure satisfactory work. A licensed applicator with a minimum of 5 years
experience on similar joints shall install the specified joint seal.
1.04 SUBMITTALS BY THE CONTRACTOR
A.The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all the expansion joint details
required for this particular project for approval by the Consultant in addition to
Manufacturer's literature with an applicable portions deleted.
B.Where required by jurisdiction, the Contractor shall submit test data showing that the
expansion joint system (including fire barrier material) meets or exceeds fire rating
requirements. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with requirements set forth or
adopted by the local jurisdiction.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All materials shall be delivered on the job and stored in a place protected from damage,
moisture and exposure to the elements in exact accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of expansion joints and sealants under
adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's
Bridger Garage Repairs EXPANSION JOINT SEALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 95 00/2
recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather
conditions are favorable for proper cure and strength development of the nosing material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.The expansion joint seal system shall be a complete system of compatible materials
designed by the manufacturer to produce a waterproof, traffic-bearing expansion joint
seal. The system shall also meet or exceed any fire rating requirements set forth by the
local building code requirements.
B.The gland elements shall be a continuous, factory extruded unit for the entire straight
run length of the joint. Changes in direction or elevation shall be accomplished by
factory molded elbows, tees, crosses and the like. The seal shall be turned up a
minimum of 6 inches (vertically) unless otherwise shown on plans. The seal element
shall not be mitered/jointed unless approved by the Consultant in writing and shall
meet the following performance criteria.
Tensile Strength ASTM D412 1,500 psi
Elongation at Break ASTM D412 175 % (Min.)
Hardness, Type A durometer ASTM D2240 64 ± 5
The premolded elements shall be a continuous, factory molded unit for the entire
straight run length of the joint. Changes in direction or elevation shall be accomplished
by factory molded elbows, tees, crosses and the like. The seal shall be turned up a
minimum of 6 inches (vertically) unless otherwise shown on plans. The seal element
shall be mitered/jointed at all changes in direction and shall meet the following
performance criteria.
Tensile Strength ASTM D412 250 psi
Elongation at Break ASTM D412 500 % (min)
Hardness, Type A durometer ASTM D2240 30+/-5
C.Expansion joint systems approved for use in one or more applications are provided in
the master list below. Due to variations in specific details of the locations, expected
movement, expected traffic exposure, availability, ease of installation and existing
blockout geometry, all systems are not suitable for one particular project. The
Contractor shall reference the specific expansion joint detail on the specific project
drawings and list of approved products shown on the drawings, including gland size, etc.
for the respective condition. Equivalent products are acceptable, provided approved by
the engineer.
D.Approved Products – Horizontal Applications
1.“Wabocrete Membrane 201 system,” model, manufactured by Watson Bowman
Acme, (www.wbacorp.com).
Bridger Garage Repairs EXPANSION JOINT SEALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 95 00/3
2. “Iso-Flex Winged Expansion Joint Sealing System”, J series manufactured by
LymTal International, Inc. (www.lymtal.com).
3. “Lokcrete Membrane Expansion Joint System”, LMS series, manufactured by
MM Systems, (www.mmsystemscorp.com).
E. Approved Products – Horizontal Cover Plate Applications
1.. “Wabo Safetyflex Heavy Duty Joint Cover” manufactured by Watson Bowman
Acme, (www.wbacorp.com).
2. “Iso-Flex PD Series Cover Plates”, manufactured by LymTal International, Inc.
(www.lymtal.com).
3. “Hinged Safety Cover System”, manufactured by MM Systems Corporation,
(www.mmsystemscorp.com).
F. Approved Products – Vertical Applications
1. “Wabo Weatherseal”, manufactured by Watson Bowman Acme,
(www.wbacorp.com).
2. “Iso-Flex VS Series”, manufactured by LymTal International, Inc.
(www.lymtal.com).
3. “Vertical Sealing System”, manufactured by MM Systems Corporation,
(www.mmsystemscorp.com).
G. Contractor shall review specific details on drawings for each project regarding products
and model numbers approved for use.
Due to various joint width openings and overall block-out dimensions, the Contractor
and expansion joint supplier should verify field condition prior to bid submission and
execution of the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Preparatory Work
1. The block-out shall be provided to the specified dimensions and acceptable to
the manufacturer. The licensed installer shall additionally verify that the ‘as-
built’ configuration of the block-out for the expansion joint will allow the
expansion joint to be installed such that elevation differences in the vicinity of
the joint and across the joint will not exceed industry and ADA-related
recommendations. Any edge raveling at the joint opening or spalls shall be
repaired with a suitable compound to provide a solid, square block-out.
Bridger Garage Repairs EXPANSION JOINT SEALS
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 07 95 00/4
2. The block-out substrate shall be sandblasted clean of all contaminants and
impurities immediately prior to the system installation to assure proper
adhesion.
3. The membrane gland element shall be unpackaged and laid in a relaxed position
to relieve any temporary set from shipment packaging prior to placement. The
pre-molded element shall be wiped clean with a solvent solution such as
toluene.
4. It is recommended that adjacent deck surfaces be taped off and protected to
assure a clean, neat professional installation.
B. Installation
1. The entire installation shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instruction.
2. Follow standard manufacturer’s recommendation for installation of the
material, taking into account block-out dimensions, joint width and ambient
temperature conditions.
3.02 TESTING
All new expansion joint seals shall be tested. Any leaking observed shall be rectified by the
Contractor and the joint shall be re-tested until no leakage is observed. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to absolutely make certain that the joints are totally waterproofed.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/1
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and could include, but not be
limited to, the following:
1. Painting parking lines, arrows, handicap symbols and curb edges.
2. Painting exposed steel reinforcing and miscellaneous metals where noted with a
zinc rich primer containing 92-95% metallic zinc in dry film.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paint Coordination:
Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime paints used. Review other
sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure
compatibility of the total coatings system for the various substrates.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. SSPC-"Systems and Specifications", published by the Steel Structure Painting
Council.
2. Painting and Decorating Contractor’s of America (PDCA) Technical Manual as a
reference standard.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's technical information in standard printed published form,
including performance criteria, label analysis, application instructions and MSDS
sheets for each material proposed for use.
2. List each material and cross-reference to the specific paint and finish system and
application. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
B. Samples:
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/2
1. Submit color chip samples and verify color selections from 12” x 12” draw down
cards of each color required, for Owner/Consultant’s review.
2. Color shall be as herein specified or as selected by the Consultant prior to the
start of work and final confirmation based on actual samples in the field.
1.05 OWNER'S INVENTORY
A. Provide one gallon of each color used, to Owner, for maintenance purposes.
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all paint to site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers. Labels shall bear
manufacturer's name, brand, type of paint, Federal spec. number (if applicable), color of
paint, and instructions for reducing.
B. Store materials and equipment in a designated storage space on the site. Keep storage
space neat, clean and accessible at all times. Protect floors from paint spillage.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Place paint or solvent-soaked rags, waste, or other materials which might constitute a fire
hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the close of each day's work.
Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire.
B. Provide foam type 2-1/2 gallon capacity fire extinguishers for each paint storage space.
C. Protect the work of all other trades against damage, marking or injury by suitable covering
during the progress of the painting and finishing work.
1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine all surfaces to receive coatings and report to the Consultant any condition which
is not acceptable. Commencement of work and in any area constitutes acceptance of
conditions and places the responsibility for a workmanlike job on this Section.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. and 95 degrees F., unless
otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%;
or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL QUALITY
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/3
A. Provide only absolutely pure linseed oil, turpentine, shellac, and other like materials that
are of the highest quality, with identifying labels intact and seals unbroken. Use no
thinners other than those specified by the manufacturer.
B. Use only primers and undercoaters that are suitable for each surface to be covered and
that are compatible with the finish coat required.
C. Use products of the same manufacturer for succeeding coats.
1. Where shop primed materials are to be finish painted and/or prime coat materials
are by a different manufacturer than the finish coat materials, confirm
compatibility of the primers with the manufacturer of the finish coat paints.
2. Where existing previously painted surfaces are to be finish painted, confirm
compatibility of existing painted surfaces with the manufacturer of the succeeding
new paints.
3. Where specific products by selected manufacturers are named, approved equals
from ICI Paint Stores, Dunn Edwards Corp., Frazee/Deer-O, Sherwin-Williams
Paint Co. and Pioneer Paint may be submitted.
D. All materials shall comply with Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 59, Subpt. D, Table 1
of Section 40CFR Parts 53-59, Volume 5, 2004 Edition.
2.02 METAL PRIMERS
A. General:
1. For new metal surfaces not otherwise specified for shop prime painting and for
touch-up painting of shop prime coats, provide one of the following metal primers
as appropriate for the surface condition and finish coats of the metal.
a. Field touch-up painting shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA 1-64 and shall
be of the same kinds and number of coats as applied in the shop.
b. Refer to other sections of these specifications for shop primed items.
B. Ferrous Metal Primers:
1. Hot rolled steel surfaces to receive alkyd or acrylic latex finish coats shall be
primed with one of the following primers:
a. Syn-Lustro (W8), Corrobar (43-5), Galv-Alum (43-7) or Bloc-Rust (43-4) by
Dunn Edwards PRO-CRYL B66-310; Sherwin Williams.
d. PPG 94-231
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/4
or approved equal.
C.Non-ferrous Metal Primers:
1.Surfaces to receive alkyd or acrylic latex finish coats shall be primed with one of
the following primers:
a.Syn-Lustro (W8), Galv-Alum (43-7) or Ultra-Grip (W 715) by Dunn
Edwards.
b.Or approved equal.
D.Primers for Galvanized Metal:
Existing galvanized surfaces should be etched with Metal Etch (JASCO-0702-1) or
approved equal after being solvent cleaned to remove oil, grease and other contaminants.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS
A.Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B.Ferrous or Non –Ferrous Metals:
1.Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss or Gloss Finish
a.1st Coat-metal primer as specified elsewhere in this section.
b.2nd Coat-Semi-Gloss or High gloss acrylic enamel Syn-Lustro W9 or
Permagloss W960 by Dunn Edwards, or approved equal.
c.3rd Coat- Semi-Gloss or High gloss acrylic enamel Syn-Lustro W9 or
Permagloss W960 by Dunn Edwards, or approved equal.
.
d.Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness including primer.
C.Zinc Coated Metal:
1.Acrylic Direct-To-Metal (DTM) system.
a.Pretreat galvanized metal as specified elsewhere in this section.
b.1st Coat-Semi-Gloss or High gloss acrylic enamel Syn-Lustro W9 or
Permagloss W960 by Dunn Edwards, or approved equal.
d.2nd Coat- Semi-Gloss or High gloss acrylic enamel Syn-Lustro W9 or
Permagloss W960 by Dunn Edwards, or approved equal.
.
e.Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness including primer.
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A.General:
1.Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the
paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular
substrate condition.
2.Clean surfaces to be completely dry prior to applying primers, paints or surface
treatments. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents. Do
not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. For excessive
chalked surfaces, pressure washing or scrubbing the surface with a stiff brush and
mild detergent is necessary. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
3.Before applying succeeding coats, primers and undercoats shall be completely
integral and shall perform the function for which they are specified. Properly
prepare and touch up all scratches, abrasions or other disfigurements and remove
any foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. All spot-priming or
spot-coating shall be featheredged into adjacent coatings to produce a smooth
and level surface.
B.Cementitious Materials:
Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete to be painted by using approved cleaning
solvents and high-pressure power washing with minimum pressures of 2,500 to 5,000
PSI at a flow of 4 to 14 gallons per minute in accordance with SSPC SP1 to thoroughly
remove all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to
remove glaze, or provide sufficient bite on existing painted surfaces.
C.Ferrous Metals:
1.For new ferrous metals, after erection is completed, touch-up heads of bolts,
welded surfaces which are unpainted, and surfaces or areas where the primer has
been abraded or otherwise damaged. For Paint System 2.07 B.1 use SSPC SP-2
and SSPC PC-3 Hand and Power tool Cleaning prior to application of the touch-up
painting. For Paint System 2.07 B.2 use SSPC-SP6.
2.For existing ferrous metals in good condition, power wash using approved
cleaning solvents and minimum pressures of 2,500 to 5,000 PSI at a flow of 4 to
14 gallons per minute in accordance with SSPC SP1.
3.For ferrous metals that are heavily corroded metal, or have loose rust, mill scale,
coatings, or other detrimental foreign matter, sandblast clean to SSPC-SP6.
D.Galvanized Metals:
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/6
1.All galvanized metals to receive factory Paint-Grip Phosphate Surface Treatment,
or approved equal.
2.Prior to paint application, clean galvanized metal surfaces of all oil, grease and
other contaminants in accordance with the applicable requirements of SSPC-SP 1-
63 "Solvent Cleaning" and prime as specified elsewhere in this section.
3.Prior to application of subsequent coats, thoroughly clean all surfaces to ensure
the removal of any grease, soil, dust or foreign matter. Take particular care to
prevent the contamination of cleaned surfaces with salt, acids, alkali or other
corrosive chemicals before prime coating and between subsequent coats of paint.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A.Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
B.Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used
in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials
and residue.
C.Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as
required during the application of the materials.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.Apply paint with brush, roller, spray, or other acceptable practice in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions.
B.Spread all materials evenly and smoothly without runs, sags or other defects. Make edges
of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping.
C.The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has completely
dried. Sand between each enamel coat application with fine sandpaper, or rub surfaces
with pumice stone where required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance
with the coating manufacturer's directions.
D.Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the
final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
E.For each coat of paint use slightly different shade than preceding coat. Tint final
undercoat to color of finish coat.
Bridger Garage Repairs PAINTING
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 00/7
F.Paint directional arrows, parking stalls, marking lines, handicap symbols, etc., to be as
detailed on the Drawings. Unless otherwise detailed, single line width to be four (4")
inches wide. Striped areas shall be four (4) inch wide lines eighteen (18) inches on center.
Lay out all painted lines and define with chalk markings for approval before proceeding
with painting.
G.Install stall striping using a gravity flow method approved by the Consultant. Spray
painting will not be approved.
3.04 APPLICATION OF CONCRETE COATING
A.Apply concrete coating in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, employing
technically trained personnel, using equipment specifically designed for this purpose.
B.Apply Concrete Coating in two applications with a fine texture to match approved sample.
C.Minimum dry film thickness shall be 6.0-8.0 mils per coat.
D.Finished work shall match approved samples; be uniform in sheen, color and texture and
be free from defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
E.Verify dry film thickness of completed surfacing system in the field, at random, using a
Tooke Inspection Gauge. Minimum thickness shall be as specified excluding foundation or
fill coats. Conduct tests in presence of Consultant or his representative.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A.During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials,
rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day.
B.Upon completion of painting work, clean paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise
damage finished surfaces.
C.At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Bridger Garage Repairs PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 14/1
SECTION 09 90 14
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Contract Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.This Section includes all labor, equipment and services to paint following items of types, patterns, sizes,
and colors as shown on Contract Drawings:
B.
1.Parking Stall Stripes
2.Traffic Arrows, crosswalks, accessible stall access aisles, walkways, symbols, stop bars, words and
other markings
3.International Symbol of Accessibility
4.Curbs and curb ramps at unobstructed locations subject to tire impact.
C.Related Work:
1.Pavement Marking Contractor shall verify compatibility with sealers, joint sealants, caulking and
all other surface treatments as specified in Division 7.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.Provide paint specifications data as follows:
1.Manufacturer’s certification that the material complies with Federal specifications where
required in this Section.
2.Intended paint use.
3.Pigment type and content.
4.Vehicle type and content.
B.Submit list of similar projects (minimum of 5) where pavement-marking paint has been in use for a
period of not less than 2 yrs.
C.Material Safety: Contractor shall provide Engineer/Architect with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
for all materials and supplies used.
D.See requirements of Division 1 Section, “Submittal Procedures,” Part 1 heading, “Submittal Procedures,”
for limits to resubmittals.
E.See requirements of Division 1 Section, “Submittal Procedures,” Part 2 heading, “Requests for
Information,” for RFI constraints.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Bridger Garage Repairs PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 14/2
A.Provide written 1-year warranty to Owner that pavement markings will be free of defects due to
workmanship, inadequate surface preparation, and materials including, but not limited to, fading and/or
loss of markings due to abrasion, peeling, bubbling and/or delamination. Excessive delamination,
peeling, bubbling or abrasion loss shall be defined as more than 15% loss of marking material within one
year of substantial completion and/or occupancy of the parking area. With no additional cost to Owner,
repair and/or recoat all pavement marking where defects develop or appear during warranty period and
all damage to other Work due to such defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.All paint products shall have drying characteristics in accordance with the drying time performance
requirements of Type I of Federal Standard TT-P-1952D.
B.Pavement marking materials shall meet Federal, State and Local environmental standards.
C.Acceptable pavement marking paints:
1.Concrete Surfaces:
a.Sherwin Williams - Pro-Park Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint B97 Series.
b.Provide Aggregate for slip resistance at crosswalk markings.
2.Traffic Membrane Surfaces:
a.Urethane Paint - Sherwin Williams – Corothane I HS, B65 Series.
3.Single Paint for both Concrete and Traffic Membrane Surfaces:
a.Urethane Paint - Sherwin Williams - Corothane I HS, B65 Series.
D.Water-borne paint may be used for special color pavement markings (blue) meet requirements of
Federal Specification TT-P-1952D. Special color marking materials shall be compatible with the white
and yellow pavement markings where they are layered.
E.Paint shall be manufactured and formulated from first grade raw materials and shall be free from defects
or imperfections that might adversely affect product serviceability.
F.Paints shall comply with the National Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings,
Environmental Protection Agency, 40 CFR Part 59 (1998.)
G.The product shall not contain mercury, lead, hexavalent chromium, or halogenated solvents.
H.Color of paint, unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings, shall be white and daylight directional
reflectance (without glass beads) shall not be less than 84% (relative to magnesium oxide) when tested
in accordance with Federal Test Method Standard 141, Method 6121.
I.Paint color for blue accessible parking space pavement markings, if shown on Contract Drawings, shall
match federal color chip No. 35180. Color shall have daylight directional reflectance (without glass
beads) of not less than 52% (relative to magnesium oxide) when tested in accordance with Federal Test
Method Standard 141, Method 6121.
J.Pavement marking materials shall have a static coefficient of friction equal to 0.8 for markings on
accessible ramps, curbs and curb ramps and a static coefficient of friction equal to 0.6 for all other
Bridger Garage Repairs PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 14/3
markings. Silica sand and/or glass beads may be used to achieve the required coefficient of friction, in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
K.International Symbol of Accessibility proportions shall be as shown in ANSI A117.1-1992 and Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines - 1991.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Inspect surfaces to which paint will be applied and report immediately in writing to Engineer/Architect
as required in General Conditions any conditions detrimental to proper execution of this Work.
B.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are acceptably remedied.
C.Striping shall not be placed until full cure of concrete slab and sealer. Concrete surfaces generally
require 30 to 90 days @ 70°F or higher.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Before commencing work, make certain that Work to be painted is in proper condition to receive
painting materials, that surfaces are clean, dry, smooth, and at proper temperature as recommended
by paint manufacturer.
B.Do not paint or finish any surface that is wet or damp.
C.Clean all surfaces free of adhering foreign matter, dirt and dust.
D.Lay out all striping, using dimensions and details shown on Contract Drawings, before painting. Report
any discrepancies, interferences or changes in striping due to field conditions to Engineer/Architect prior
to painting. Pavement Marking Contractor shall be required to remove paint, repair surface treatment
and repaint stripes not applied in strict accordance with Contract Drawings.
E.Work Areas:
1.Store, mix and prepare paints only in areas designated by Contractor for that purpose.
2.Provide clean cans and buckets required for mixing paints and for receiving rags and other waste
materials associated with painting. Clean buckets regularly. At close of each day's Work, remove
used rags and other waste materials associated with painting.
3.Take precautions to prevent fire in or around painting materials. Provide and maintain
appropriate hand fire extinguisher near paint storage and mixing area.
F.Mixing:
1.Do not intermix materials of different character or different manufacturer.
2.Do not thin material except as recommended by manufacturer.
G.Disposal:
Bridger Garage Repairs PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
DESMAN Project 60-22103.01-2 09 90 14/4
1.Contractor shall properly dispose of unused materials and containers in compliance with Federal
Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) of 1976 as amended, and all other applicable laws
and regulations.
3.3 APPLICATION
A.Apply paint in 2-coat system; first coat shall be 50% of total 15 wet mil minimum thickness, (urethane
paint has smaller mil thickness) not to exceed 8 mils. First coat shall be cured prior to installation of
second coat. At Contractor’s option, one coat may be applied before substantial completion, with a
second coat delayed for 3-6 months until weather conditions are appropriate and the concrete has cured
sufficiently for proper adhesion.
B.Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applications
and techniques best suited for material and surfaces to which applied. Minimum air shall be used to
prevent overspray. Temperature during application shall be minimum of 40º F and rising, unless
manufacturer requires higher minimum temperature. Maximum relative humidity shall be as required
by manufacturer.
C.All lines shall be straight, true, and sharp without fuzzy edges, overspray or non-uniform application.
Corners shall be at right angles, unless shown otherwise, with no overlaps. Line width shall be uniform
(-0%, +5% from specified width). No excessive humping (more material in middle than at edges or vice
versa.)
3.4 CURBS AND CURB RAMPS
A.Paint vertical surface and the first 6 in. of the abutting horizontal surface at the top of all curbs within
parking facility except those which do not exceed 3’0” in width and abut a wall, bumper wall guardrail
or other construction (not including landscaping or equipment) which prevents passage of pedestrians.
B.Paint color for curbs and curb ramps shall be yellow.
END OF SECTION